You are on page 1of 182

T R I O L A K 06

VAR I AB L E S P E E D DRI VE
FO R ES P A P P L I C AT I O N S

Operat io n Manu al

S o f t w a r e v e r s i o n
o f a n U M K A - 0 3 c o n t r o l l e r i s 3 3 . 3 9 .

А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M

e v e r y t h i n g n e w e m e r g e s n o w
Dear Customer!
Thank you for purchasing the equipment produced by Triol Corporation. We are sure that our
Variable Speed Drive (VSD) of Electrical Submersible Pumps (ESP) for crude oil production equipped with
ESM and PMM series motors and a frequency converter of Triol AK06 series (hereafter referred to as
Variable Speed Drive) will be operated effectively and will make a profit for you.

We also want to remind you that the VSD purchased by you is a complex electrical device and its inexpert
and unqualified operation may cause breakdown of the drive and submersible equipment. That’s why
we strongly recommend you to study carefully the Operating Manual before starting the operation of the
VSD and to pay attention to the safety precautions (Section 2.1.1).
A set of documents supplied with the VSD consists of the following:
• Operating Manual;
• Datasheet.
The present Operating Manual describes technical data, design, service, rules of operation and
maintenance of the VSD produced by Triol Corporation.
Abbreviations used in the text of the document are as follows:
ARC – Automatic reclosing;
ACS – Automated control system;
TUL – Trip on underload;
OLP – Overload protection;
VSDC – Variable Speed Drive controller;
OCP – Overcurrent protection;
TS – Tubing string;
ESM – Electrical submersible motor;
PMM – Permanent magnet motor;
VSD – Variable Speed Drive;
TMS (DME) – Telemetering system (Downhole Measuring Equipment);
ACVOT – AC voltage oil transformer;
ESPU – Electric submersible pumping unit;
ESP – Electric submersible pump;
QF1 – Circuit breaker for power circuits
QF2 – Circuit breaker for lighting and DMS;
QF3, QF4 – Circuit breaker for control circuits;
QF5 – Circuit breaker for fans;
QF6 – Circuit breaker for standby power supply;
APF – Active Power Filter.

2
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
OperatingContents
Manual

Contents

1 Description and operation................................................................................................................5


1.1 Variable Speed Drive function.......................................................................................................5
1.2 Variable Speed Drive specification...............................................................................................7
1.3 VSD configuration..................................................................................................................................... 8
1.3.1 VSD structure...............................................................................................................................8
1.3.2 Function of VSD components............................................................................................................. 10
1.4 VSD design and operation...................................................................................................................... 13
1.4.1 VSD capabilities..........................................................................................................................13
1.4.2 VSD operating modes................................................................................................................15
1.5 Packaging and marking................................................................................................................19
2 Intended use.....................................................................................................................................20
2.1 Preparation of VSD for use..........................................................................................................20
2.1.1 Safety precautions.....................................................................................................................20
2.1.2. General instructions.................................................................................................................21
2.1.3. The order of installation, placement, installation................................................................21
2.1.4. The procedure for installation, arrangement, installation.................................................21
2.1.5 ESPU starting preparation........................................................................................................22
2.1.5 VSD starting procedure.............................................................................................................29
2.1.6 VSD setup for manual mode of operation..............................................................................29
2.1.7 VSD setup for automatic mode of operation..........................................................................31
2.1.8 VSD setup for mode of operation by “PMM” algorithm........................................................33
2.2 Variable Speed Drive operation..................................................................................................34
2.2.1 Protection setting procedure...................................................................................................34
2.2.1.1 Setting the alarms by external signals........................................................................................... 37
2.2.2 Features conclusion to mode and elimination of complications.........................................37
2.2.2.1 Features start and conclusion to mode, provided a complete set of ESP
submersible telemetry.........................................................................................................................37
2.2.2.2 Elimination complications.........................................................................................................38
2.2.3 VSD switching-off procedure....................................................................................................40
2.2.4 Troubleshooting in Variable Speed Drives Triol AK06...........................................................40
2.2.4.1 Checking operability at no load................................................................................................40
2.2.4.2 Troubleshooting at ESM startup and troubleshooting algorithms..........................................41
2.2.3.3 Checking VSD with shorted output circuit; checking IGBT modules........................................52
2.2.4 Faults and alarm conditions.........................................................................................................53
2.3 Operator interface. Description of UMKA-03 controller and its operation...........................53
2.3.1 General........................................................................................................................................53
2.3.2 Description of operator interface............................................................................................55
2.3.2.1 Entering the menu....................................................................................................................56
2.3.2.2 Status display mode..................................................................................................................57
2.3.3 Description of the UMKA-03 controller menu........................................................................57
2.3.3.1 UMKA-03 controller first-level menu .......................................................................................57

3
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2.3.3.2 “Commissioning” first-level menu.............................................................................................60
2.3.3.3 “ESM actual parameters” first-level menu................................................................................60
2.3.3.4 “VSD actual parameters” first-level menu.................................................................................61
2.3.3.5 “Modes of start” first-level menu..............................................................................................73
2.3.3.6 “Drive settings” first-level menu................................................................................................79
2.3.3.7 “Alarms” first-level menu...........................................................................................................81
2.3.3.9 “Downhole measure equipment” first-level menu (Telemetry)................................................93
2.3.3.10 “Installation parameters” first-level menu............................................................................101
2.3.3.11 “Calc.of step-up transf.tap voltage” first-level menu............................................................101
2.3.3.12 “Event log” first-level menu...................................................................................................112
2.3.3.13 “Start-up graph” first-level menu..........................................................................................116
3 Transportation...............................................................................................................................118
4 Storage............................................................................................................................................119
5 Maintenance...................................................................................................................................120
5.1 Preparation of the VSD for operation......................................................................................120
5.1.1 ADAM modules configuration................................................................................................122
5.2 Replacement of the transformer unit (universal)..................................................................125
5.3 Replacement of the automatic circuit breaker QF1...............................................................126
5.3.1 Replacement of the automatic circuit breaker in 6-pulse variable speed drive................ 127
5.3.2 Replacement of the automatic circuit breaker in 12-pulse variable speed drive...................... 128
5.4 Replacing module fan.................................................................................................................129
6 Disposal...........................................................................................................................................132
Appendix А Variable speed drive overall dimensions........................................................................... 133
Appendix B Diagram of external VSD connections with ADAM............................................................ 134
Appendix C Instruction on telemetry unit connection.......................................................................... 136
Appendix D Description of UMKA-03 controller menu.......................................................................... 138
Appendix Е Table of voltage losses values.............................................................................................. 169
Appendix F Modem Fargo 100 Maestro instruction.............................................................................. 171
Appendix G List of elements and electric schematic diagram.............................................................. 182

4
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

1 Description and operation


1.1 Variable Speed Drive function
Variable Speed Drive is designed for controlling and protecting electrical submersible pump systems for
oil production equipped with ESM by TC 3381-002-40148343-2010, PMM or equivalent with the rated
power of 50 to 900 kW.
The rated values of climatic factors:
• ambient temperature of –20 to + 60 °C (the characteristic –40 to +60 °C under the order);
• environment is unexplosive, free of corrosive gases or vapors in such concentration that may
cause destruction of metals and insulation; not saturated with current-conducting dust or water
vapors.
Protection degree of VSD cabinet is NEMA 3R as per NEMA 250-2008.
Variable Speed Drive running position is vertical; allowable deviation in any direction is 5°.
Working value of external factors:
• sinusoidal vibration frequency range is 0.5 to 35 Hz;
• maximum amplitude of sinusoidal vibration acceleration is 5 m*s-2 (0.5 g);
• shock acceleration peak value at multiple shocks is 30 m*s-2 (3 g);
• duration of shock acceleration at multiple shocks is 2 to 20 ms.
The VSD design provides possibility for replacement of all the basic modules, functional units
and circuit board in the field. All couplings and connections between units and circuit boards are
detachable and demountable; there is no need to perform soldering when replacing any failed unit
inside the VSD.
VSD must be operated by a specially instructed and authorized staff having electrical safety qualification
of at least 3rd level.

1.1.1 Variable Speed Driver symbol structure


Identification code of Triol Variable Speed Drive:
The VSD with an electric pump Triol АК06-XX - ХXX - Y Y Y Y Y Y - ХХХ
1 2 3 456789 10
1 full name of product type;
2 type of drive unit:
AM asynchronous motor;
АН asynchronous high Speed motor;
PC progressive cavity pumps;
PM permanent magnet motor;
PH permanent magnet motor high Speed;
MM multipurpose motor;
SM synchronous motor;
LL linear slow motor.

5
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
3 rated current of the VSD primary power circuit, A;
4 type of input power rectifier:
0 thyristor-thyristor six-pulse rectifier circuit;
1 diode-thyristor six-pulse rectifier circuit;
2 transistor bridge active rectifier circuit;
3 diode-thyristor twelve-pulse rectifier circuit;
4 diode-thyristor eighteen-pulse rectifier circuit;
5 variable speed drive (without frequency converter);
6 diode-diode six-pulse rectifier circuit;
7 passive input grid filter;
8 VSD with input active filter.
5 availability of build-in output sinewave filter:
0 without build-in sinewave output filter;
1 with build-in sinewave output filter.
6 availability of bypass:
0 without bypass device;
1 complete bypass device;
2 incomplete bypass device.
7 climatic version:
0 for tropical dry zone;
1 for cold and moderate climates;
2 custom climatic version.
8 controller type:
0 without controller;
1 Variable Speed Drive is ready for connecting with a controller of third party;
2 special modeling is stipulated within an order;
3 with controller UMKA-03;
4 with controller UMKA-04;
5 with controller UMKA-05.
9 modification:
0 basic modification;
1...9 customized modification based on the client’s requirements.
10 supply line voltage.

6
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

1.2 Variable Speed Drive specification


Supply voltage is three-phase, 380 to 480 V with deviations within –25 to +15 % with supply voltage 380 V and
within -25 to +10 % with supply voltage 480 V. In case of complete VSD supply voltage loss, controller keeps
running and monitoring the parameters for at least 3 seconds depending on the VSD power and the DC-link
state of charge as the Variable Speed Drive is alternatively powered from the DC-link capacitor.

Power line frequency is 50/60 Hz ± 5 Hz.


Rated output voltage is 0 to 480 V, 3 phase, with deviation within ± 2 %. Insulation resistance is not less than
20 MOhm.
Output frequency range is 1,5 to 80 Hz, with deviation ± 0,1 % (± 0,1 Hz) for asynchronous motor.
Output frequency range is 1,5 to 200 Hz, with deviation within ± 0,1 % (± 0,1 Hz) for permanent magnet motor.
Overcurrent is maximum 120 % of rated value for 60 s. Efficiency is not less than 97 %.
Controller storage capacity is 8 Mb, that makes it possible to save up to 150 000 records in the event log.
Operating mode is continuous running duty.
Control of motor overheating is not provided by drive.
It is acceptable to power from networks capable of producing no more than 480 V maximum and using XXX
fuses class with rated current of XXX:
- Approved fuses of category JDDZ, with maximum rated current - 400% of the product output current, we
recommend testing with approved fuses of class RK5 (other types are also acceptable). The operation manual
will limit using of fuses with the same or better characteristics.
- Special-purpose fuses (semiconductor fuses) approved, category JFHR2, the maximum acceptable rated
value is not defined by the standard,
- Circuit breakers (molded-case circuit breakers / current-dependent circuit breakers) approved by category
DIVQ. The maximum permissible rated current is 400% of the output current.
- CMC disconnectors of E type, approved by UL - Approved by category NKJH.
The built-in short-circuit protection does not protect the mains supply. The mains supply must be protected in
accordance with the operating instructions, the US National Electrical Code and any additional local regulations.

7
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The rated current of the primary power circuit, the output power for different types of control station are given
in Table 1.1.

Table 1.1 — Rated current and output for VSD of different types

Output values at 480/380 V


Rated
kVA, Current of overload
Model output cur-
480/400 during 60 s, А
rent, А
AK06-MM-100-
80/63 100 120
ХХХХХХ-480
AK06-ХХ-160-
130/102 160 192
ХХХХХХ-480
AK06-ХХ-200-
200/158 250 300
ХХХХХХ-480
AK06-ХХ-250-
330/261 400 480
ХХХХХХ-480

Output voltage THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) at the sinewave filter output shall not exceed 5 %.
Induced-voltage non-sinusoidality ratio at 3x380 V output terminals meets the requirements of
IEC 61000-4-30:2003.
For VSD with an input active power filter, the input voltage THD is less then 5 % in accordance with
IEEE519.

1.3 VSD configuration


1.3.1 VSD structure
Physically the Variable Speed Drive is made as a metal cabinet with four-sided access, degree of protection
is NEMA 3R.
Special devices for slinging are provided on the top cover of the VSD cabinet.
In the bottom part of the Variable Speed Drive cabinet there are supports ensuring its steady positioning
when installing at the site and protecting the drive doors against snow drifting. In the support bases
there are holes for fastening the Variable Speed Drive with the help of anchor bolts.
General view of Variable Speed Drive AK06-XX-ХХХ-XXXXXX-480 is shown in Annex A of this manual.
Variable Speed Drive cabinet has three separate sections: power section with control system, section of
power winding components, connecting section. Power section and power winding components section
are arranged one above another, connection section is arranged on a right side of VSD. The left front
door gives an access to all components of VSD, the right front door gives an access to cable connection
section.
Doors have stops fixing them in the open state, special locks and seals ensuring the required degree of
protection. Besides, each door has an electric blocking to trip the motor when the doors are opened.

8
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Interior arrangement of Variable Speed Drive cabinets is shown in Figure 1.1.

Figure 1.1 — Interior arrangement of Variable Speed Drives cabinets model for AK06-ХХ-100-
ХХХХХХ-480 up to AK06-ХХ-480-ХХХХХХ-480

The following devices are disposed inside the cabinet:


• drive control system;
• inverter power units (from 1 to 3 pieces, depending on VSD modification);
• rectifier power units;
• cooling system for internal VSD space;
• circuit breakers for control system and cooling system fans.
Each shipment of Variable Speed Drive includes a fully configured information retrieval device (1 flash
drive per 10 VSDs or per delivery lot).
Upon Customer’s request any Variable Speed Drive may be equipped with a watt-hour meter and
a modem. Modem adjusting procedure is shown in Annex F.
The following elements are disposed on the VSD control section front panel:
• UMKA-03 controller;

9
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
• light alarm indicators of VSD status;
• USB-port for connecting data information reading and recording device.

1.3.2 Function of VSD components


UMKA-03 controller controls electric drive, reads the actual values of pumping unit working parameters, and
reads programs the setpoints.
Electric drive provides frequency regulation of the motor Speed, its start up and stop, protection in emergency
modes of operation. Electric drive comprises the following components: NX control system module with IND
integrated controller submodule, diode/SCR (thyristor) modules, control assembly of diode/SCR modules and
packages of inverter power modules.
Arrangement of circuit breakers and indicators on the front panel of control section is shown in Figure 1.4.

Figure 1.2 — Arrangement of elements on the control section front panel

10
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Green indicator HL1 (OPERATION) is intended for indicating the ESM/PMM ON state. Indicator blinking means
that some parameter has exceeded a threshold value and a countdown to protective shutdown has begun. If
the parameter value becomes normal the ESM/PMM keeps running, if not, ESM/PMM shuts down.
Yellow indicator HL2 (STANDBY) indicates the ESM/PMM OFF state with a capability of automatic restart (AR).
It shows a continuous glow if some parameter has reached a threshold value. Indicator blinking improves
operator’s awareness of the VSD status and goes to show that there are no reasons, which may prevent ESM/
PMM from starting up, and a countdown to AR begins.
Red indicator HL3 (STOP) indicates the ESM/PMM OFF state without any capability of automatic restart (AR).
White indicator HL4 (BACKSPIN) indicates dangerous voltage in VSD or the presence of EMS turbine rotation
voltage at the output terminals.
(Optional, if provided in specification: Red indicator HL5 (HEATING) is intended for VSD operated at the
temperature range of -40 to +60°C. The indicator glows continuously when VSD heating is on.)
USB-port is designed for connecting information reading and recording devices.
On the door of VSD is located button “EMERGENCY STOP”, “FREQUENCY” (for regulating output frequency of
the VSD), and “OPERATION MODE” (to switch mode between “Manual” / “Automatic”).
In the back of the connection compartment there is a terminal block for connecting an external control contact
pressure gauge, telemetry and control systems, an external control system, 84 analog inputs and outputs, 8
digital inputs, 8 relay output and so on (Figure 1.5).

11
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Figure 1.3 — Placement of telemetry terminal block

For VSD with APF module blue indicator HL1 (“OPERATION”) located on front door APF module, indicates
ON state APF module. APF module turned on automatically with beginning current consumption on VSD.

12
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

1.4 VSD design and operation


1.4.1 VSD capabilities

Variable Speed Drive ensures the following:


• Motor switching on/off;
• Electric motor operation in the following modes: manual (without any capability of the ESM/
PMM Automatic restart after protection acting); automatic with a capability of the ESM/PMM
automatic restart; and automatic by a preset time program;
• Engine braking in case turbine rotation and followed automatic restart (for ESM/PMM);
• Current optimization mode when a preset rpm is reached;
• Operation by a preset time program with ESM/PMM ON/OFF periods programmed separately;
• Motor Speed manual control using UMKA-03 controller and remote control using a supervisory
control console;
• Automatic change of the output frequency by a preset time program;
• ESM/PMM smooth acceleration and braking with assigned rate;
• Motor reversal;
• Motor operation on weakened field at rotation Speed higher than nominal (for ESM/PMM);
• Motor automatic switching on with a controlled time delay when supply voltage is applied;
• Automatic keeping a setpoint for some process parameter (pressure, current);
• Electric motor starting modes: swinging, impact start (may be used for unjamming submersible unit),
soft start with synchronization. Unjamming features the maximum motor torque at low Speed;
• Monitoring of the “cable—ESM/PMM” system isolation resistance with ESM switching-off if the
resistance is decreased below the admissible level;
• Operation when the “cable—ESM/PMM” system isolation resistance is decreased with the fast
shutdown in case of overload;
• Measurement of the actual parameters of the submersible pumping unit and ESP and their
representation on the integrated liquid-crystal display;
• Motor remote control, monitoring of motor parameters, reading and changing of protection
setpoints through a telemetering system using RS-485 interface;
• Recording of causes of ESM/PMM switching-on/off and recording the actual parameters into
the integrated non-volatile memory during operation;
• Recording of modified setpoints into the event log with date and time of the setpoint change;
• Outdoor light alarm system indicating the pumping unit state (run, wait, stop);
• Control of the motor from a submersible device (transducer);
• Overload/underload protections, current imbalance protections, protection against unacceptable
supply voltage and DC-link, against continuous low-frequency operation of Variable Speed Drive,

13
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
against overheating of power switch cooler, and against operation with telemetering parameters
beyond the preset limits, all may be adjusted in field;
• Information of the VSD door opening may be transferred to dispatching station through the
telemetering system;
• Measurement of electric energy consumption;
• Monitoring for availability of three phases of the power supply. ESM/PMM is tripped or its start
is disabled if a phase is unavailable.
Variable Speed Drive provides for the following types of protections and interlocks:
• ESM/PMM tripping when supply voltage is changed resulting in inadmissible current overload,
with the possibility of AR after voltage recovery;
• ESM/PMM tripping in case of underload (Trip on underload);
• ESM/PMM tripping in case of overload according to programmable time-current characteristics;
• ESM/PMM tripping caused by overcurrent protection (OCP);
• ESM/PMM tripping if “cable—ESM” system isolation resistance is decreased below the admissible level;
• ESM/PMM tripping caused by inadmissibly low output frequency of VSD;
• ESM/PMM tripping as a response of VSD power switch protection;
• ESM/PMM tripping if power modules are overheated;
• ESM/PMM tripping if telemetering system parameters exceed the preset points;
• ESM/PMM tripping if the pipeline pressure is inadmissible (by signals of contact pressure gage);
• ESM/PMM tripping if the power section door is opened.

If agreed with Customer, AK06 Variable Speed Drive may be complete with Ethernet support module
that enables to receive and process commands through the upper-level automatic control system (ACS)
channel over Ethernet in all operating modes of the Variable Speed Drive. To connect the Ethernet cable,
use the  8P8C socket located in the compartment where a terminal block for external connections is
placed.

Caution! For VSD with soft version 33.39 on work with SCADA via RS-485, communication
channel on Ethernet should be turned off (see “IPType” submenu “Ethernet settings”).

14
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

1.4.2 VSD operating modes

Variable Speed Drive provides for manual and automatic modes of operation so that to ensure maximum
adaptation of electric motor to specific operating conditions.
Virtually all functions of VSD are available in the manual mode except for those associated with Automatic
Restart, power-on triggering and timer operation.
Automatic mode provides for the timer operation mode with preset time values of the VSD start & stop.
Besides there is a capability of the VSD automatic switching-on when supply voltage is applied (if power-
on triggering is enabled) and after acting protections that permit automatic restart.
In all modes of operation, the VSD provides for the following methods of controlling the converter output
frequency:
• manual frequency control;
• frequency programmed control;
• pressure maintenance in oil wells by telemetry signals;
• maintaining of current preset value (current regulator).
Depending on technological peculiarities of a specific oil well and in order to resolve probable
off-nominal situations during start up, VSD provides for the following starting modes: soft start, start
with synchronization, kick start, swinging start, unjamming.
Manual mode of operation
In the manual mode of operation electric motor may be started only manually. At pressing “START” button
the motor starts operating. At the same time a green LED (RUN) lights up on the VSD front panel, and the
message “START: operator” (indicating date and time of start-up) is displayed in the left part of display in the
actual state displaying mode (Figure 1.8).

Motor Readiness Mode for Sine filter Actual time


state for operation state
start-up

Figure 1.4 — Representation of VSD current state; manual mode of operation

Motor stops running at the moment of pressing the “STOP” button or if one of the protections operates.
At the same time a red light-emitting diode (“STOP”) lights up on the VSD front panel.

15
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
If motor is tripped by pressing “STOP” button, “STOP: operator” message (indicating date and time of
shutdown) is represented in the left part of display in the mode of current state representation.
If ESM starts/stops remotely from the process automated control system (PACS) the following messages
will be displayed respectively: “START: ACS” and “STOP: ACS”.
If electric motor is tripped due to actuation of a protection the message “STOP” will be displayed in
the  left part of the screen indicating the reason of the shutdown as well as its time and date. If the
protection acting condition is still in effect a message about the active protection will be displayed on the
controller screen. In such a case the motor won’t be able to start up again (ready-to-run conditions are
not available). After restoring the parameter value abnormality of which caused the protection actuation
the above-mentioned message will disappear.
Automatic mode of operation
This is the basic operating mode of a Variable Speed Drive.
In automatic mode the VSD startup is carried out by pressing “START” button when the supply voltage is
applied (if power-on startup is enabled).
Automatic restarts of Variable Speed Drives are possible after actuation of protections permitting restarts.
After the motor switching-off caused by actuation of the AR-permitting protection the countdown of
the AR delay begins. The yellow light-emitting diode (“WAIT”) lights up on the VSD front panel; “STOP”
message indicating the cause of stop is displayed indicating also the time left to Automatic Restart. The
motor will start on expiry of this time.
To start the motor during the Automatic Restart delay counting it is necessary to press “START” button.
If the motor is switched off by a protection not allowing automatic restarts or after a preset number of
automatic restarts has been executed, “STOP” message indicating the reason of stop will be displayed,
and red LED will light up on the VSD front panel.
If “STOP” command comes from ACS (or “STOP” button is pressed) no restart will be allowed.
In automatic mode a timer operation of the Variable Speed Drive may be enabled (by preset time program).
The motor ON/OFF time is programmed separately. The ON state of timer operation is indicated by
“Timer” message in the status line (Figure 1.9). When timer operation is enabled the controller display
indicates time left to the motor START/STOP.
Motor Readiness Mode for Sine filter Actual time
state for operation state
start-up

Figure 1.5 — Representation of the VSD current state, «Automatic» mode of operation

16
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Switching of the modes does not change the motor state, i.e. the motor would keep running if it was in
operation before changing the mode, and it wouldn’t start if tripped.
Pressing “STOP” button always leads to the motor STOP (if it is running) and prevents its restart.
Parameters of the current-regulating function are given in “Current regulator” menu.
Complete list of options of “Maintain param.” parameter and their description are given in “Operating
modes” first-level menu section.
Manual frequency control
In mode of manual frequency control an operator assigns a required value to output frequency, and VSD
runs at this preset frequency.
Programmed frequency control
In mode of programmed frequency control (Figure 1.10) VSD operation is performed by the following program:
• Output frequency increase up to the initial value set as a programmed mode parameter with a
rate specified by Speeding-up parameters.
• Output frequency increase in the required band with a preset increment in a time specified by
“Freq. change time” parameter of the programmed mode up to the value set by “End freq.”
parameter of the programmed mode. In case “End freq.” parameter previously set in
“U/F characteristic” menu is less than the maximum frequency that has been set for programmed
mode the frequency will continue increasing up to the lowest value (out of two).

Figure 1.6 — “Programmed operation” window

Programmed operation has a number of advantages related to the VSD output frequency control:
• Output frequency changeability (“Output frequency” parameter) that makes it possible to
promptly change the output frequency in programmed mode of operation without switching
over to manual mode.
• Switching over from the programmed mode to the manual one and vice versa without any need
to shut down the motor.
Maintaining preset current value (Current regulator).

17
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
If current regulator is active the current value is being automatically maintained at the preset level.
Output frequency at that is being changed depending on the load value. “Current regulator” window of
UMKA-03 controller is shown below in Figure 1.11.

Figure 1.7 — “Current regulator” window

18
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

1.5 Packaging and marking

Variable Speed Drive is delivered packed in inner wrapping.


Package provides for the protection against ingress of water splashes and against ultraviolet solar
radiation as well as limitations for ingress of dust and sand.
Appearance of VSD packed is shown in Figure 1.12.
Operational documentation is packed in a leakless plastic bag put in the VSD cabinet.
Marking signs with accordance with JIS Z 0150-88 are placed on the package.
The following handling marks are provided on the package:
• “Fragile! Handle with care!”;
• “Top”;
• “Keep dry”;
• “Stacking is prohibited”,
• “Center of gravity”.
The following reference notes are provided on the package:
• Package gross and net weight;
• Package overall dimensions.

Figure 1.8 — Appearance of VSD packed

19
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2 Intended use
2.1 Preparation of VSD for use
2.1.1 Safety precautions

The Variable Speed Drive meets the safety requirements of UL61800-5-1 and CSA C22.2 NO. 274-13 as well
as the requirements of Rules for Operation of Customers’ Electrical Installations, Safety Rules for Operation
of Customers’ Electrical Installations, Rules for Safety in the Oil and Gas Industry (API BULL E 4) and Inter-
industry Rules on Labor Safety for Operation of Electrical Installations.
Mounting, adjustment and commissioning of Variable Speed Drives shall be performed with due regard
to the safety requirements imposed to the equipment grounding, resistance and strength of electrical
insulation as per provisions of EIC, ROCEI, SRARP 0.00-1.21-98, SNiP 3.05.06.-85 and RSOGI 08-624-03.
All the activities on installation, mounting, dismantling, operation and maintenance of a Variable Speed
Drive shall be carried out in conformity with effective Electrical Installations Code (EIC), Rules for Operation of
Customers’ Electrical Installations (ROCEI), Safety Rules for Operation of Customers’ Electrical Installations
(SROCEI), Rules for Safety in the Oil and Gas Industry (RSOGI), Interindustry Rules on Labor Safety for
Operation of Electrical Installations (IRLS), instructions of an enterprise (organization) that operates
a Variable Speed Drive as well as this Operating Manual.
Prior to start working with VSD the staff shall:
• be specially trained and examined in labour protection issues;
• attend a preliminary medical examination (when hired for work) and periodic health examinations
(during the entire labour activity);
• have electrical safety qualification of at least 3rd level (for operating attendants ensuring
maintenance of electrical installations alone and for foremen);
• be instructed in labour protection issues.
At conducting connection to the power supply line there shall be paid a special attention to ensuring
of reliable grounding of VSD casing. Grounding resistance shall meet the requirements of Electrical
Installations Code (EIC).
At executing any work inside a Variable Speed Drive there shall be taken the following safety measures:
• circuit breaker QF1 shall be placed to “OFF” position;
• leading-in cables shall be de-energized;
• warning tags shall be put on;
• make sure that leading-in cables are de-energized and ground them.

20
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Filter power capacitors conserve the charge hazardous to life within 5 minutes
after de-energization! Prior to execution of work inside the cabinet make sure that
capacitors are de-energized. Filter power capacitors conserve the charge hazardous
to life within 5 minutes after de-energization! Prior to execution of work inside the
cabinet make sure that capacitors are de-energized.

It is prohibited to disconnect and connect detachable joints if supply voltage is available.


Electronic control units of Variable Speed Drives contain components made on the basis
of metal-oxide-semiconductor (MOS) technology excluding the action of static electric-
ity. If you need to touch some MOS component, ground your body and the tools to be
used. When working with these units, arrange them on current-conducting pads.

2.1.2. General instructions

The control station, which was delivered to the customer, should be unpacked. After unpacking, you
need to check completeness and make an external inspection. The detected attenuation bolting
eliminate surface damage.

2.1.3. The order of installation, placement, installation

When installing the VSD, it is necessary to leave the intake of air, the space at the sides - at least 200
mm, from above and from the rear -500 mm. Input and output of power circuits and control circuits
in the VSD must be made through cable bushings. Cable bushings are installed on the underside of
the cabinet distribution box. Holes for the bushings are made in the field of operation for installation
in accordance with Anneix A. The recommended size of the bushings (hermovods, fittings) is 1.5. The
choice of an external commutation cable, the conditions for its installation, must be carried out in
accordance to the rules of electrical installation devices. Interface cables must be kept separate from
power cables. For noise-sensitive circuits it is necessary to use a shielded cable, or stranded wires in
metal hose. The cable shield (protective sleeve) must be earthed. Ground the cabinet. The grounding
should be carried out with a wire of at least 16 mm2.

2.1.4. The procedure for installation, arrangement, installation


When VSD is installing, it is necessary to leave the intake of air, the space at the sides - at least 200 mm,
above and behind -500 mm. Input/output of the power supply circuits, VSD circuits must be done with
help of cable bushings. Cable bushings are installed on the underside of the cabinet distribution box.
Holes for the bushings are made in places of operation for installation in accordance with Annex A. The

21
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
recommended size of fittings is 1/2 “, 3/4”, 1-1 / 2 “with UL certificate. The VSD proposes the installation of
couplers for connecting local cable channels, fittings or blind panels approved by UL in accordance with
UL514B standard and certified by CSA in accordance with C22.2 standard. № 18, “wed type XXX. “ or with
similar designation. The recommended placement of fittings are listed in Annex A. The recommended type
of fittings for the size: 1/2 “- RT-50, 3/4” - RT-75, 1-1 / 2 “- RT-150. The choice of an external commutation cable,
the conditions for its installation, must be produced in accordance with the rules of electrical installation
devices. Interface cables must be kept separately from power cables. For noise-sensitive circuits it is
necessary to use a shielded cable, or stranded wires in metal hose. The cable shield (protective sleeve) must
be earthed. It is recommended to use copper wiring, designed for working at the temperature of 75 ° C.

2.1.3 ESPU starting preparation


After installation of ESPU is completed, there shall be carried out a preparatory work for starting up
the ground-mounted electrical equipment. If a submersible TMS is included into the ESPU scope of
supply, both installation and performance testing of the TMS ground-mounted unit shall be conducted
before the ESPU starting.

Variable Speed Drive provides for a sufficiently wide range of functions for setting various operating
modes of the ESM/PMM and adjusting the VSD modes of operation. It is supplied to Customers with
some parameters saved in the non-volatile memory. If required, the Customer may change them.
The VSD prestarting procedure is performed either by Customer’s authorized representatives or by
employees of the Triol Corporation Service department.
Starting preparation shall include:
• Checking electrical parameters of ACVOT, Variable Speed Drive and ESM/PMM included into
the  ESPU scope of supply for compliance with the requirements; bringing the ESPU ground
mounted electrical equipment into compliance as required;
• Checking VSD, ACVOT and terminal block for functionality in the scope corresponding to the VSD/
ACVOT preparation procedure; rectifying detected faults;
• To ensure voltage supply to the VSD-feeding cable.
The Variable Speed Drive is switched on by applying the supply line voltage.
VSD is considered ready for operation when the display will welcome in the form of a picture. Information
of the VSD functionality is then displayed on the screen.
Prior to start it’s essential to adjust the VSD ensuring its proper functioning. To do that act as follows:
1. In the “Protection”/”High Voltage Network” to set the actual nominal voltage. This is necessary to
provide the rated voltage control system.
2. In the “Installation parameters” from the “Power system” to set the nominal frequency of the mains.
3. Enter the following parameters into the VSD memory:
• “Operating mode” — “Manual”/”Automatic”;
• “Power-on start” — “Enable”/”Disable”;
• “Autorun time”;
• “Rotation direction” — “Direct”/”Reverse”;

22
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

• “Acceleration rate”, Hz/sec;


• “Frequency setting”;
• “Drive type” – in accordance to the type of ESM (only for universal VSD). The “149 Starting frequency”,
“150 Starting voltage”, “151 Bending frequency”, “152 Bending voltage”, “153 Rated frequency”,
“154 Rated voltage”, “693 Max. freq. limitation” and “516 Min. contr freq.” parameters define the
U/F curve shape specifying position of the points. For certain loads of the drive a required shape
of the curve may be selected, for example, a cambered one for high-starting-torque drives.
• “Field No”;
• “Cluster No”;
• “Well No”;
• “Motor rated PF”;
• “ESM rated power”, kW;
• “Step-up tr. power”, VA;
• “ESP rated efficiency”, m3/s;
• “Setting depth”, m;
• “ESM rated current”, A.
4. Enter the drive speeding-up parameters (recommended values are 1 to 8 Hz/s).
5. Select a required transformer tap from the table and set its number. Start the Variable Speed
Drive at the frequency of 50 Hz under no load, measure the transformer output voltage using the high-
voltage filter. Make sure that output voltage is high enough for the ESM/PMM powering. Change the tap
if required. Switch off the Variable Speed Drive. Connect the ESM/PMM submersible cable to the ACVOT
terminals. Cable armor shall be fastened under the grounding bolt. Replace the transformer cover.
6. Check and set, as appropriate, some parameters defining functionality of the ESM/PMM and VSD
protections. List of protections’ parameters is given in Table 2.1.

Table 2.1 — List of parameters protections

Designation of menu item (parameter) Type of parameter Unit of measurement


Overload Second-level menu
Total ESM current Information А
Overload set value in percent Information %
Overload setpoint Setpoint A
Starting time Setpoint s
Overload trip delay Setpoint s
Protection Setpoint
Number of restarts Setpoint
Overload restart delay Setpoint min
Fast trip Setting

23
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table 2.1

Designation of menu item (parameter) Type of parameter Unit of measurement


Underload Second-level menu
Total ESM current Information A
Load factor Information %
Underload Current set value Information A
Underload set value in percent Setpoint %
Underload setpoint Setpoint A
Starting time Setting s
Underload trip delay Setting S
Protection Setting
Number of underload restarts Setting
Underload restart delay Setting min
Underload set value limit Setting
No of pumpings per hour Setting
Current unbalance Second-level menu
Current unbalance Information %
VSD input current unbalance Setpoint %
Current unbalance set value Setpoint %
Starting time Setting s
Stop delay Setting s
Protection Setting
Number of restarts Setting
Restart delay Seting min
Insulation Second-level menu
Current R insulation Information kOhm
R insulation set value Setpoint kOhm
Protection Setting
Starting time Setting sec
OFF time Setting sec
Number of restarts Setting
Restart delay Setting min

24
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table 2.1

Designation of menu item (parameter) Type of parameter Unit of measurement


Ris Comp Coefficient Setting %
Ris Assembly jumper Setting
Ris Limit Setting Setting kOhm
Bypass Delay Setting ms
Uris Setting V
Ris Bridged circuit Voltage Setting mV
Ris Measurement Counter Setting
Ris Filtration Coefficient Setting
Frequency backspin Second-level menu
Frequency backspin Information Hz
F max set value Setpoint Hz
Protection Setting
ESM turbine rotation deceleration Setting
COTF Number of ARS Setting
COTF Restar delay Setting min
Catch-on-the-fly Setting
Low line voltage Second-level menu
RS input voltage Information V
ST input voltage Information V
TR input voltage Information V
U input min set value Setpoint %
U input min set value (480 V) Setpoint %
Starting time Setting s
Stop delay Setting s
Protection Setting
Restart time Setting s
Volt. Number of restarts Setting
High line voltage Second-level menu
RS input voltage Information V
ST input voltage Information V

25
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table 2.1

Designation of menu item (parameter) Type of parameter Unit of measurement


TR input voltage Information V
U input min set value Setpoint %
U input min set value (480 V) Setpoint %
Starting time Setting s
Stop delay Setting s
Protection Setting
Restart time Setpoint s
Volt. Number of restarts Setpoint
Unbalance of line voltage Second-level menu
RS input voltage Information V
ST input voltage Information V
TR input voltage Information V
Input voltage unbalance Information %
Line unbalance set value Setpoint %
Starting time Setting s
Stop delay Setting s
Protection Setting
Restart time Setting s
Volt. Number of restarts Setting
Voltage of direct current circuit Second-level menu
Ud voltage Information V
Min Ud set value Setpoint V
Max Ud set value Setpoint V
Min Ud set value (480 V) Setpoint V
Max Ud set value (480 V) Setpoint V
Number of restarts Setting
Restart delay Setting min
Power switches overheating Second-level menu
U phase IGBT temp. Information °С
V phase IGBT temp. Information °С

26
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table 2.1

Designation of menu item (parameter) Type of parameter Unit of measurement


W phase IGBT temp. Information °С
OFF temp. IGBT Setpoint °С
Protection Setting
Number of restarts Setting
Restart delay Setting min
Overcurrent Second-level menu
VSD total current Information А
Overcurrent protection Setpoint А
Protection Setting
Number of restarts Setting
Restart delay Setting min
Power switches Second-level menu
Number of restarts Setting 3
Restart delay Setting min
Protection Setting
Low frequency Second-level menu
Output frequency Information Hz
Min. frequency Setpoint Hz
Starting time Setting s
Stop delay Setting s
Protection Setting
Number of restarts Setting
Restart delay Setting min
Door Second-level menu
Electric blocking Setpoint
Door Information
Field Kill Second-level menu
Field Kill Source Setting
Active level Setting
Protection Setting

27
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table 2.1

Designation of menu item (parameter) Type of parameter Unit of measurement


Connection with ACS Second-level menu
Protection ACS Setting
Off time Setting s
Number of restarts Setting
Restart delay Setting min
Connection with DME Second-level menu
Protection DME Setting
Off time Setting s
Number of restarts Setting
Restart delay Setting min
Connection with ADAM Second-level menu
Protection ADAM Setting
Off time Setting s
Number of restarts Setting
Restart delay Setting min
ARS counters Second-level menu
ARS counters Setting
ARSCountResetVolt Setting min
ARSCountResetOverload Setting min
ARSCountResetUnderload Setting min
ARSCountResetCurUnbal Setting min
ARSCountResetOther Setting min
TimeToCountResetVolt Information min
TimeToCountResetOverload Information min
TimeToCountResetUnderload Information min
TimeToCountResetCurUnbal Information min
TimeToCountResetOther Information min
ARSnumbCounterOverload Information
ARSnumbCounterUnderload Information
ARSnumbCountCurUnbal Information

28
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table 2.1

Designation of menu item (parameter) Type of parameter Unit of measurement


ARSCountReset Manual Setting

These parameters are used at each start of the electric submersible pumping unit. During the VSD
commissioning all the parameters shall be previewed (manufacturer set values shall be changed).
Entering of values, navigation through menus and data display shall be available from the interface
keyboard by using “CANCEL“, “ENTER“, “ ”, “ ”.
If oil well shall operate in periodic mode the Variable Speed Drive shall be definitely switched over to automatic
mode of operation with a timer enabled where a required period of operation and the pause time shall be set.
If mode of the VSD output frequency slow rise shall be used there shall be set the “Modes of operation” —
“Program mode” parameter, required values of maximum and minimum frequency, frequency increment
step and time interval per each step.

2.1.5 VSD starting procedure


1. Check for accuracy and reliability of external connections.
2. Inspect the cabinet visually for foreign objects and make sure that electronics modules and power
buses have no water traces.
3. Ensure that all door locks are closed.
4. Apply the supply voltage. A screen-saver will appear on the UMKA-03 controller screen. To enter
the current-state display mode you may press “Cancel” button. Otherwise the screensaver will
disappear in 15-20 sec and the status menu will be displayed on the UMKA screen.

2.1.6 VSD setup for manual mode of operation


1. Check the set values required for starting. The list of settings and their values is shown in Table 2.2.
Description of settings is given in Annex D.

Table 2.2 — List of the values specified

Designation of set values Value


“Installation parameters” menu
Step­-up tr. power As per certificate for ESM
Motor rated PF As per certificate for ESM
Step-up tr. rated power As per certificate for ESM
ESM rated voltage As per certificate for ESM
Motor rated voltage As per certificate for ESM
Motor rated freq. As per certificate for ESM

29
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table 2.2

Designation of set values Value


“Calc. of step-up transf. tap voltage” submenu
ESM rated voltage 380 V
“Drive settings” menu, “U/F characteristic” submenu
Starting frequency 1,50 Hz
Starting voltage 0V
Bending frequency 10,00 Hz
Bending voltage 76 V
Nominal frequency 50,00 Hz
Nominal voltage 380 V
Min. freq. limit 30,00 Hz
Max. freq. limit 50,00 Hz
Rectifier U/F No
“Alarms” menu
Underload set value
As per recommendations for processing
Overload set value

2. It is a good practice to start up the VSD at frequency about 2 Hz. The VSD operation at such a frequency
and 10 to 20 % of ESM/PMM rated current, confirms that electric wiring is correct. Activation of the
current protection is indicative of a short circuit in the ACVOT low voltage side circuits.
3. Then it’s necessary to increase the value up to 15 Hz. If the VSD output current achieves its rated
value at that frequency, it means that the ESM turbine rotation or wedging of the pumping unit.
Under normal operation of ESM its current usually does not exceed 30 % of the rated one specified
in the datasheet for this product.
4. Then, a required value shall be set. Note that continuous running of the motor at low frequencies
is unacceptable. After the motor Speeding up to a preset frequency, set ESM underload setpoint
(typically 10 to 20 % lower than the steady-state load factor of the motor).
5. In mode of programmable gain of the VSD output frequency, use “Program mode” menu of UMKA-
03 controller. Select “Program. F” in “Maintain parameter”. Suitable values shall be assigned to
“Start. freq.”, “End freq.”, “Frequency change step”, “Frequency change time” parameters.
If a protection has activated, find out and rectify the reason of the activation following directions of
the “Troubleshooting” section of this Operating Manual.
After the VSD starting, check the compliance of the ESM controller-induced current with that measured
by a clamp meter. Besides, the ESM current shall be set according to motor ratings.

30
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

2.1.7 VSD setup for automatic mode of operation


1. Check for accuracy and reliability of external connections.
2. Inspect the cabinet visually for foreign objects and make sure that electronics modules and power
buses have no moisture traces.
3. Apply the supply voltage. A screen-saver will appear on the UMKA-03 controller screen. To exit
the current state display mode you may press “Cancel” button. Otherwise the screen-saver will
disappear in 15-20 sec and the status menu will be displayed on the UMKA screen.
4. Setting of current regulator parameters is not required.
5. Define and eliminate the reason of the emergency protection acting, if any, following directions of
the “Troubleshooting” section of this Operating Manual.
6. After the VSD starting it’s necessary to check the compliance of the ESM/PMM controller
induced current with that measured by a clamp meter. A possible error caused by the voltage
drop at the  filter choke may be offset by setting the ESM current compensation parameters
(“004 ESM current, phase U”, “005 ESM current, phase V”, “ESM current, phase W” parameters in
“ESM actual parameters” menu).

Table 2.3 — List of parameters protections


Designation of set values Value
“Installation parameters” menu
As per recommendations specified in the “Installation
Step-up tr. power
parameters” Section
ESM rated power As per certificate for ESM
“Modes of operation” menu, “Manual/Automatic” submenu
Operating mode Auto
“Modes of operation” menu, “Operation by timer” submenu
Prog. Operation To be disabled
“Modes of operation” menu, “Current regulator” submenu
Maintain parameter
Current setting
As per recommendations for processing
Parameters of “Non technol. param-
eter regulator” menu
“Modes of operation” menu, “Shaking” submenu

31
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table 2.3

Designation of set values Value


Acceleration rate 10 Hz/s
Deceleration rate 10 Hz/s
“Modes of start” menu
Start up mode As per recommendations for processing
“Drive settings” menu, “U/F characteristic” submenu
Starting frequency 1,50 Hz
Starting voltage 0V
Bending frequency 10,00 Hz
Bending voltage 76 V
Nominal frequency 50,00 Hz
Nominal voltage 380 V
Min. freq. limit 30,00 Hz
Max. freq. limit 50,00 Hz
Rectifier U/F No
“Protections” menu
Overload set value in percent 105 %
Overload setpoint 1,0 А
Underload set value in percent 105 %
Underload setpoint 1,0 А
“Modes of start” menu (for work with PMM only)
Startup menu According technological recommendations
Accel./Decel. rate of AC el.m 4 V/s
Unlocking Off
Locked No
“Drive setting” menu, “Valve motor parameters”(with working valve motor only)
Units Hz
Number of pole pairs According to motor type
Setting of power factors Default
Sinus filter Included

32
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table 2.3

Designation of set values Value


Type of valve motor L According to motor type

2.1.8 VSD setup for mode of operation by “PMM” algorithm


1. In “Installation parameters” menu following parameters should be specified:
• Drive type – PMM;
• ESM rated current – in accordance with motor nameplate, A;
• ESM rated voltage – in accordance with motor nameplate or based on the expected maximum
rotation Speed, V.
Note: If it is planned to use the motor at a frequency higher than rated, then into this parameter set
value, calculated by the formula:
U = UratESM (Fmax / FratESM )
where UratESM – ESM rated voltage in accordance with motor nameplate, V;
Fmax – maximum ESM operating frequency, Hz;
FratESM– ESM rated frequency in accordance with motor nameplate, Hz.
Calculated voltage value will be higher than motor nameplate ESM rated voltage.
Motor rated freq. – ESM rated frequency in accordance with motor nameplate, Hz.
Note: If it is planned to use the motor at a frequency higher than rated, then into this parameter set value
of Fmax – maximum ESM operating frequency.
2. Set following parameters in the “Drive settings” menu:
• AC el. motor type (PMM type) — according to nameplate data (see under registration certificate) are
choosing from a number of values:
›› 3000 rpm;
›› 6000 rpm;
›› 10000 rpm;
• “Efficiency factor set value” — 0,85.
3. Enter: setting depth, cable cross section, reservoir temperature — in “Calc. of step-up transf. tap voltage”
FIRST-level menu.
4. See recommended voltage tap value (sealing off value) in “Recommended U step-up trans.” parameter.
Set in “Step-up tr. tap U” parameter (but don’t set it actually into the step-up transformer!) the nearest
higher tap voltage value which could be set into step-up transformer.
5. Check U/f characteristic (“Drive settings/ U/f characteristic” menu). 4-th point’s voltage should be under
310 – 340 V (for 380 V supply line) or 400 – 440 V (for 480 V supply line). If this value is larger – enter
in “Step-up tr. tap U” parameter the next higher value of step-up transformer voltage. And change U/f

33
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
characteristic one more time. Conduct operations above while 4-th point’s voltage get into range 310 –
340 V (for 380 V supply line) or 400 – 440 V (for 480 V supply line).
6. Set into step-up transformer (by corresponding switches) the same voltage as in “Step-up tr. tap U”
parameter.
7. Start-up is enabled when oil production and electrical equipment are ready.
8. If under start-up, after DC-link charged up at once, Overcurrent or Overload emergencies take place:
Fix the value of VSD output voltage in “Event log/Log viewing mode” menu immediately before Overcurrent
or Overload emergencies take place. If this value is less than 50 % by VSD U/f characteristic – reduce
voltage of nearest point of U/f characteristic in such way: the voltage value must corresponds to VSD
output voltage before emergence (“Drive settings/ U/f characteristic” menu). Vice versa, if this value is
over than 50 % by VSD U/f characteristic – increase voltage of nearest point of U/f characteristic in such
way: the voltage value must corresponds to VSD output voltage before emergence. Start-up VSD. If issue
remains, repeat actions beginning from the previous item.
9. If under accelerating or after capture of set frequency the Overcurrent or Overload emergencies take
place and actions from item 8 do not help — in this case reduce “Efficiency factor set value” (“Drive
settings/Parameters of an AC electronic motor” menu) up to 0.8 (0.9 as default). If after repeated start-up
the issue does not vanish — continue reducing of cos φ up to 0.7.

2.2 Variable Speed Drive operation

2.2.1 Protection setting procedure


Overload protection setting
Overload protection is required for electric motor tripping if operating currents exceed the rated ones
so that to prevent the ESM from overheating and to avoid a rupture of the stator winding. Setting of
the overload protection is carried out before the ESPU start-up meeting the requirements of the VSD
operation manual.
To set the motor overload protection, the parameters of “Overload” second-level menu (“Protections”
menu) are assigned.
A reverse ampere-second characteristic is set by “095 Overload setpoint” and “ 096 Starting time”
parameters. The characteristic makes the controller define the tripping time of the overloaded motor.
The ampere-second characteristic is defined by the following formula:

Tset x I2set = Tprot x I2oper (2.1)

where Тset — is the value of “096 Starting time”, parameter that specifies the time interval. After
the time interval has passed the motor trips only if its current is equal to the one that is set by “095
Overload set value”, parameter, sec;
Iset — is the value of “095 Overload set value”, parameter; motor current is represented as a
percentage of the rated one (“090 ESM rated current” parameter, “Installation parameters” menu),
reaching or exceeding of which the motor tripping countdown will start, %;

34
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Тprot — is motor operation time in the overload mode (protection acting time), sec;
Ioper — is motor operating current in the overload mode (motor current is represented as a percentage of
the rated one), %.
Selection of optimal voltage.
Optimal voltage at the step-up transformer output is subject to adjustment when the well killing fluid has
been pumped out and the ESPU has reached the steady-state operation mode. Selection is carried out by
stepwise voltage reduction, i.e. by switching the transformer taps. These taps cannot be switched when ESM
is running as this may cause transformer failure.
Variable Speed Drive provides the automatic harmonizing of the optimal voltage. Voltage optimality criterion
is the minimum operating current of the electric motor. Automatic selection of the optimal voltage makes it
possible to select optimal voltage for the running motor depending on its operating conditions. Automatic
selection is fulfilled in cycles with a specified time interval after the operating frequency has been set and/or
after the ESM Speed of rotation has been changed.
To control the parameters of optimal voltage selection it’s necessary to set up the parameters of the “Current
optimization” second-level menu (“Modes of operation” section of the first-level menu).
Trip on Underload setting
Prior to setting Trip on Underload (“Underload”), the optimal ESM voltage should be selected.
ESPU operates in the normal mode when the inflow approximates to the rated capacity of the unit and the
dynamic level is stable (Нdin = const). Under such conditions the operating current Ioper, consumed by ESM
should be constant. In case of unstable fluid influx the dynamic level will go down to the critical value when
the head produced by the pump is insufficient for overcoming hydrostatic pressure of the fluid column in
tubing string. In this case the pump stops pumping the fluid and runs idle. Such a phenomenon is called
pump underload operation. Pump underload operation may be caused by a variety of reasons:
• large content of free gas at the ESP suction side;
• clogging of tubing string, float valve or flow passages in the pump
• malfunction of wellhead fitting or oil-gathering main (no passage)
Pump underload operation causes phenomena, which influence negatively to ESPU serviceability:
• lack of fluid flow in ESM causes its excessive heating;
• pump efficiency is 0 %, at which case the power consumed by the pump normally is not lower than
50 % of the pump rating. If pumpage is zero, all the energy consumed by the pump is wasted for
heating the pump and the surrounding fluid. Heating of fluid in the pump may result in a localized
steam generation, which in turn causes dry friction in working parts of the pump and their accelerated
wear.
As a rule, pump starvation entails such consequences as cable fusing, loss of seal section, breakdown of
the ESM stator winding insulation.
To prevent such phenomena Variable Speed Drives provide for the Trip on Underload (“Underload”). Since
under conditions of pump starvation the power consumption is considerably lower than that in normal
operating mode, the protection operation is based on the monitoring of current consumption. If the current
value goes down to the critically low level, the Variable Speed Drive trips the ESPU, therefore pump starvation
protection may be called Trip on Underload.

35
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Underload performance check
Performability of the Trip on Underload shall be checked as follows:
• To set time delay to 300 s;
• To decrease the Underload setpoint (“102 Underload setpoint” parameter) so that it corresponds to
the actual load. The “OPERATION” indicator on the front panel will be switched into flashing mode and
the tripping (Underload operation) countdown will start;
• To restore the previous setpoint as per protection setup procedure.
Setting of Trip on Underload against submersible motor loading
Before starting the Trip on Underload shall be disabled.
Trip on Underload (TUL) shall be set after 1 hour lapse of operation, after the proper rotation — following
the measurement of delivery to AGMS (automated group metering station) — has been confirmed. For
this purpose it’s necessary:
• to hold the motor actual loading fixed;
• setpoint for the Underload protection operation shall be set to 90 % of the actual loading;
• to readjust the Underload protection with regard to the actual values of loading (current) in
the process of the well commissioning, if necessary (substitution of well-killing fluid by formation
fluid, inflow from reservoir or presence of gas).
ESM/STM loading shall be defined by a corresponding parameter in the VSD controller or by using
available function intended for monitoring the ESM/STM real power component. If such a capability is
not provided in the Variable Speed Drive, ESM/STM loading shall be defined as a ratio between the ESM/
STM operating current and rated current multiplied by 100 %.
Setting of mains voltage drop protection
Setting of protection against voltage drops is performed in order to stabilize the ESPU operation.
Maximum voltage: Umax = 150 V. Operation time delay shall be set to 5 sec.
Minimum voltage: Umin = 80 V. Operation time delay shall be set to 5 sec.
Setting of phase current imbalance protection
Phase current imbalance protection is required to ensure stability of the ESM operation, which guarantees
its maximum MTBF (mean-time-between-failures). Recommended phase current imbalance shall not
exceed 10 %:
ΔI= (ΔImax/ Imean) * 100 % (2.2)
where ΔI — phase current imbalance, %;
ΔImax — maximum deviation of current from the mean value, A;
Imean — arithmetic mean value of phase currents, A.
Setting of phase voltage imbalance protection
Phase voltage imbalance protection, just as the phase current imbalance protection, is required to
ensure stability of the ESM operation. Value of the phase voltage imbalance shall not exceed 10%.
Setting of protection against low resistance of “ACVOT — Cable — ESM” system

36
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Protection against low resistance of the “ACVOT — Cable — ESM” system is designed to prevent
breakdowns of the current-carrying parts of the system. Set value of low resistance for this system shall not
exceed 30 kOhm.
Setting of turbine rotation protection
Protection against turbine rotation is intended for preventing ESPU startup when the liquid is being
drained from the tubing string. Set value is 5 Hz. If such a protection is provided in the Variable Speed
Drive, self-triggering time at this VSD shall be set to 1—5 min.

2.2.1.1 Setting the alarms by external signals

To configure alarms via external binary signals, the submenu “Setting of digital signals” is provided in
the Inputs / Outputs menu.
Each accident occurs in its section:
• High Pressure;
• Low Pressure;
• High temperature;
• Low temperature;
• Emergency Stop;
• External Fault;
• DHS fault;
• Door Main;
• Door JB.

Each section has standard settings for customization


• Source: Defines the input to which the sensor is connected to implement this protection;
• Current state: Displays the protection status, depending on the logic level of operation;
• Logic: determines the level of protection operation;
• Protection: (on / off / autoreclose) allows you to activate / deactivate protection / set to work in
automatic reclosure mode;
• Switch-on time: the time after the protection has tripped, which will activate the reclosure;
• Turn-off time: the delay of the trip.

 To configure alarms for external analog signals, the submenu “Analog signal settings” is provided in
the Inputs / Outputs menu.
Each emergency occurs in its section:
• Tubing Head Pressure;
• Casin Head pressure.
The alarm is set up according to the accident adjustment method for analogue TM.

37
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2.2.2 Features conclusion to mode and elimination of complications

2.2.2.1 Features start and conclusion to mode, provided a complete


set of ESP submersible telemetry
Features of startup and commissioning provided that ESPU is equipped with submersible telemetering
system
When launching a well after reconditioning or overhaul at annular pressure of 0 atm it would be hard to
accurately define the static level Нstat. and change of the dynamic level (Нdyn.) after ESPU has been put into
operation. If the data on pressure at the suction side is available Нstat. and Нdyn. may be defined more exactly.
Pressure at the pump suction side may be converted into meters of liquid column using the following formula:

(2.3)

where Ldepth — pump setting depth, m;


Нliquid— relative liquid column above the pump suction side (setting depth).
Нliquid may be calculated using the formula:

(2.4)

where Рtrans — pressure at the pump suction side according to the transducer readings, atm;
Рannular — annulus pressure, atm;
r oil — base oil density, kg/m3.
After ESPU has been put into operation, when identifying correct direction of the ESPU shafts rotation
– following the conversion of the pressure value at the pump suction side into the meters of liquid
column (change of Нdyn) Рintake (Нdyn) rate of decline shall be compared with the values of Нdyn, given in
Tables. Compliance of the Рintake (Нdyn) decline rate with the table values implicitly goes to prove the
correctness of the rotation direction.
Data from the submersible sensor regarding the ESM winding temperature and the temperature at
the pump suction side shall be used for monitoring the ESM temperature conditions. The ESM temperature
rise above +105 °C is indicative of insufficient cooling of the submersible motor. It’s necessary to identify
the  reason of the ESM temperature rise. Among the possible causes of such a rise we may denote
insufficient inflow from the reservoir, incorrect rotation of the ESPU shafts, faulty sealing of the tubing
lift and insufficient pumping head of ESPU at instantaneous rotational Speed.
When commissioning a well, use of the data from the submersible transducer (Рintake , Тmotor , Тintake, vibration)
as well as other operating parameters of the well (Нd , Q, Рannulus , etc.) allows to evaluate the operating
conditions of the “ESPU — well” system more precisely, to reduce a risk of imperfect commissioning and
failure of the unit.

38
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

2.2.2.2 Elimination complications


If in the process of commissioning there appear some troubles you shall contact the OPE Process Service
and the ESPU supervisor. Subsequent operations shall be performed in presence of the engineering
personnel of the Production Workshop.
In case of the VSD tripping caused by overload and its subsequent no-starting the second attempt to
restart the Variable Speed Drive shall be made no sooner than in 30 min (if the float valve in the tubing
string is leaky the liquid drain and turbine rotation are likely to take place).
To reduce the waiting time the catch-on-the-fly mode under conditions of turbine rotation shall be used.
In case of no-start the user shall switch off the frequency converter, disconnect submersible cable from
the transformer and measure the insulation resistance of the “Cable — ESM” system from the frequency
converter to the unit proper. If the isolation resistance not less 5 MOhm — perform a trial no-load (idle)
run of frequency converter (performance check).
Jamming
In case of the unit jamming (no run-up) it shall be flushed. Method of flushing shall be chosen depending
on the availability/unavailability of float valve in the tubing string as well as on the availability/unavailability
of circulation.
When restarting the unit try to run it up with reverse rotation. If the unit starts, keep it running within
5 –10 min after which switch the direction of rotation. If the unit cannot reach the preset frequency value
another attempt of unjamming) should be made.
Variable Speed Drive makes it possible to perform unjamming by one of the following ways:
Kick start — start of the VSD wherein a sequence of higher-voltage pulses is applied to the motor during
its Speeding-up with low frequency.
Start-up with reversible rotation — start of the VSD is performed intermittently with changing directions
of rotation.
Start with hard unjamming — start of the VSD, during which the maximum motor torque is being
reached at the low frequency. At the frequency, defined by “712 Slip frequency” parameter (refer to ESM
datasheet), low-frequency voltage is applied over two seconds in such a way that the ESM current is twice
as large as the ESM rated current at this frequency.
In case of the ESPU unjamming with reverse rotation keep it running within 5 to 10 min after which
change the direction of rotation and remain the unit in operation provided that monitoring of the current
loads is ensured. The ESPU operating current shall not go beyond the rated value.
In case of the unit jamming (no run-up) it shall be flushed. Method of flushing shall be chosen depending
on the availability/unavailability of float valve in the tubing string as well as on the availability/unavailability
of circulation.

39
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Faulty sealing of the tubing string
If the tubing pipe is leaky the ESPU usually operates normally.
Ioper. is observed in the following domain:
Iх.х.* 1.2 < Ioper. < Irated.
Protections are adjusted.
It’s impossible to detect tubing string leakage by monitoring the values of operating current. The same
may be detected using two pressure gauges and a measuring device (MD). If the pressure reading in
buffer (Рbuf.) is equal to or slightly greater than the reading of Рreservoir., and the measuring device indicates
low pumping capacity of the ESPU unit, the leaktightness shall be checked by closing the gate valve.
After the unit has been switched off one may observe the value on the pressure gauge (e.g. 40 kg/cm2)
which shall remain constant within a certain time. If the pressure rises at switching the unit on or it starts
dropping rapidly after the unit has been switched off, we may come to the conclusion that the tubing
string is leaky.
Disruption of spline coupling connecting motor with the pump
If splines of the coupling which connects motor to the pump are disrupted the unit operating current is
close to or lower than 120 % of the ESM floating current. Such a current may be observed also at low dynamic
level (Нdyn.), when the unit is running with underload. In this case the ESPU shall be stop to 2 – 3 hours
so that to recognize the problem. Start the unit after Нdyn. in the well has been increased. If the value of
the ESM operating current does not increase we may come to a conclusion that the splines are disrupted.

2.2.3 VSD switching-off procedure


When switching the VSD off the following operations shall be performed:
• stop the motor if it is running;
• if the motor is not running, make sure that it is not in the standby mode being ready to start
operating by automatic restart or by timer. If it is not the case (“WAIT” yellow indicator is glowing,
a corresponding message is displayed on the UMKA-03 controller screen) press the “STOP” button.
When switching off the Variable Speed Drive to perform any works that imply opening of doors, it’s
necessary to switch off the QF1 circuit breaker.

2.2.4 Troubleshooting in Variable Speed Drives Triol AK06

All works shall be carried out only by a qualified personnel meeting the requirements of Rules for
Operation of Customers’ Electrical Installations, Safety Rules for Operation of Customers’ Electrical
Installations and the enterprise’s safety instructions.
The works supervisor shall have at least the 4th category in safety engineering.
When conducting any mounting operations inside the Variable Speed Drive the latter shall be
de-energized and the Ud link shall be discharged.

40
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

2.2.4.1 Checking operability at no load


1. Hook up the supply.
2. Select the manual mode, set the output frequency to 50 Hz.
3. Push the “START“ button on the UMKA-03 controller “on-the-no-load run”. Check the charge on
capacitors DC link, “OPERATION” indicator switching on and increase in output frequency.
4. Push the “STOP“ button.
5. Switch over the Variable Speed Drive into the automatic mode of operation. Enable the timer
operation and set the running time to 1 minute. Press the “START“ button. Upon expiry of the
running time countdown make sure the “WAIT” indicator is on.
6. Push the “STOP“ button. Switch over the Variable Speed Drive to the manual startup mode.

2.2.4.2 Troubleshooting at ESM startup and troubleshooting


algorithms

Troubleshooting of VSD at start ESM, fault finding charts are given in Table 2.4. Troubleshooting power
active filter (for Variable Speed Drivers with active power filter (hereinafter - APF), fault finding charts are
given in Table 2.5.
Table 2.4 — List of problems at ESM startup

Potential problem/
Message Probable causes
№ Remedies
on the controller dis- of message displaying
play
LTC module is faulty Replace the electronics unite
Switch-on QF1...QF3 circuit
QF1...QF3 circuit breakers
UMKA-03 controller breaker, check the switching-
is off
display is not glowing on the other circuit breakers
1
after the supply voltage
has been applied Controller power supply
Check the circuit integrity
circuits are open

Controller is faulty Replace the controller

Check lightguidess of optical


interface (communication
No communication be- cable)
tween controller UMKA-
03 and Drive Check if the communication
Station cannot be
over the RS-485 interface is
switched. “Drive
2 available
Connect” message is
displayed Perchance IND
controller have the soft- Replace IND software ver-
ware incompatible with sion by that compatible with
the UMKA controller UMKA
software

41
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Continuation of Table 2.4

Potential problem/
Message Probable causes
№ Remedies
on the controller dis- of message displaying
play
Perchance IND control-
ler have the software Replace IND software ver-
“VersPO”
3 incompatible with the sion by that compatible with
message is displayed
UMKA controller soft- UMKA
ware

42
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Continuation of Table 2.4

Potential problem/
Message Probable causes
№ Remedies
on the controller dis- of message displaying
play
Short circuit in the out- Remove the cause of short
put power circuit circuit
Disconnect load from ACVOT
before checking. In “Modes of
operation/Test mode” menu
Turn-to-turn short cir- select test mode – ACVOT,
cuit in ACVOT press the “START” button,
wait until testing is completed.
Replace ACVOT if the test
results show a failure
Switch-off the step-up trans-
former power supply. Start-
Turn-to-turn short up the VSD.
circuit in ESM or in the If the Overcurrent protec-
submersible cable tion does not operate (VSD
starts without other issues)
— check cable and ESM
Adjust the U/f characteristic.
Step down voltage of the
In current failure or in first reference point.
last event in status menu If this failure won’t disappear
4 U/f characteristic is set
the following message is perform the same opera-
incorrectly
dis-played: “Overcurrent” tion with the second refer-
ence point. The following
relation shall be met at that:
U1<U2<U3<U4
Connect the load corre-
VSD load exceeds the
sponding to the VSD rated
rated one
one
Faulty current sensor
Replace current inverter
(if “Overcurrent” is taken
power unit in this phase
place in a certain phase)
“Overcurrent” set value The OCP set value may be
is increased but no more than
too low by 2.5 Irated
IGBT module is faulty
Replace current inverter
Driver of power switch- power unit in this phase
es is faulty
Replace the electronics
NX module is faulty
unite

43
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Continuation of Table 2.4

Potential problem/
Message Probable causes
№ Remedies
on the controller dis- of message displaying
play
Adjusting the controller
software settings is
needed (it realizes only by
service specialist of Triol
Error of the Drive soft- Corporation):
ware version - rated VSD parameters
- rated ESM parameters
- operating mode adjusting
“WrDrw” -maintain parameters
5
message is displayed adjusting
In the UMKA “Limit problems”
menu find a parameter fallen
Attempt to write a pa- outside the preset range, de-
rameter with unaccept- fine its value within this range.
able value into the Drive You may enter only by using
manufacturer’s password.
Contact Service Center
Check the insulation resis-
ESM /PMM cable insu-
tance by megohmmeter,
lation breakdown
replace cable
Check the insulation resis-
In current failure or in ESM/PMM insulation tance in
last event in status breakdown circuit “ESM cable — ESM”
6 menu the following by megohmmeter
message is displayed:
“Rinsul.” Set the “Rinsul.” value as
“Rinsul.” setpoint is not
per recom-mendations for
adjusted
processing
Replace the electronics
LTC module is faulty
unite
Motor underload pro- Remove the cause of under-
In current failure or in tection has acted. Motor load.
last event in status was under- running for Restart the Variable Speed
7 menu the following over the preset time Drive
message is displayed: Remove the cause of
“Underload” Underload protection shall
underload. Restart the
be adjusted
VSD

44
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Continuation of Table 2.4

Potential problem/
Message Probable causes
№ Remedies
on the controller dis- of message displaying
play
Short circuit at the VSD Remove the cause of short
output circuit
Inspect power switches. If
Power switch of a corre- no damages are revealed,
sponding phase is failed restart the VSD (at idle run-
ning)
In current failure or in
last event in status Replace loops by known
Driver — NX unit loop
menu the following good ones.
has not connected or it
message If the failure disappears, it is
is faulty
8 is displayed: explained by loops
“PowSw U”
(“PowSw V”, “PowSw No power supply to one Check power supply to driver
W”) driver in a phase out of current
Interchange the position of
drivers.
If the failure goes over to
Driver of power switch-
another phase, the failure is
es is faulty
explained by the driver.
Replace the driver by a known
good one
Current is not increased
at the VSD output at
starting up (load is con- No power supply to Check power supply to in-
9
nected). drivers verter power unit
Frequency is increased
at that

45
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Continuation of Table 2.4

Potential problem/
Message Probable causes
№ Remedies
on the controller dis- of message displaying
play
Measure the current at the
VSD output using the clamp-
on meter. If its readings differ
from the VSD ones, it means
Faulty current sensor
that current sensor is faulty
or the current calibration is
adjusted improperly (view the
next Item)
Start up the Variable Speed
Drive setting such frequency
that the VSD output current
In current failure or in is as close to the VSD rated
last event in status current as possible. Check
10 menu the following compliance of the UMKA-in-
message is displayed: duced currents (“VSD actual
“CurrUnb” Output currents are parameters” menu) using
calibrated improperly the on-clamp meter installed
at the VSD output. If these
readings differ for more than
5 %, in the “Drive setting/
Calibration of ESM currents”
menu – set the current
values for UMKA equal to the
on-clamp meter readings
Replace the inverter power
Driver of power switch-
unit by known good one
es is faulty

Too low voltage even


in one input phase of Check the input volt-
power circuit age across inlets of
In current failure or in all three phases using
last event in status No voltage even in one a multimeter,correct the
11 menu the following input phase of power inconsistency
message is displayed: circuit
“PhFail”
Check wire wholeness be-
Measurement circuits are
tween busbars and rectifier
open
unit

46
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Continuation of Table 2.4

Potential problem/
Message Probable causes
№ Remedies
on the controller dis- of message displaying
play
Check the “527 Min Ud set
value”
parameter in the “Protec-
tion/
Voltage of direct current
“527 Min Ud set value” circuit” menu. The “527 Min
parameter is incorrect Ud set value”
parameter shall be not more
In current failure or in
than 380 V. If this value is
last event in status
higher then the specified
menu the following
12 one, set the “527 Min Ud set
message is displayed:
value” parameter to 380 V
“Ud min”
Check as per Item 20 of this
Short circuit in Ud-link
Table
Check input voltage across
Drop of mains voltage
the inlet using a multimeter
Breakdown on the Check insulation resistance
ground in one of the of output cables using a mul-
output phase cables timeter
Check the “528 Max Ud set
value” parameter in the “Pro-
tection/Voltage of
In current failure or in
direct current circuit” menu.
last event in status
“528 Max Ud set value” The “528 Max Ud set value”
13 menu the following
parameter is incorrect parameter shall be 770 V. If
message is dis- played:
this value differs from the
“Ud max.”
specified one, set the “528
Max Ud set value” parameter
to 770 V
Turbine rotation is not
14 in- duced in case of LTC module is faulty Replace LTC module
coast stop

47
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Continuation of Table 2.4

Potential problem/
Message Probable causes
№ Remedies
on the controller dis- of message displaying
play
“Overcurrent” failure
may Replace IGBT modules in the
occur at the VSD problem phase. If the failure
starting. Imbalance does not disappear make
of output currents is replacements in the follow-
Failure in one of the
15 observed. When the ing order:
inverter’s phases
VSD is running, unusual - adapter card
sounds may be heard in - driver
the sine-filter compart- - loop from control unit to
ment (clicks, uneven Driver
noise)
Check voltage across the Ud
link using a multimeter when
the Variable-Speed Drive is
powered off. If it is not equal
to zero, the Ud link is oper-
able. Proceed to the next item.
If it is equal to zero, check
DC link charging don’t the Ud link resistance. If the
happens with VSD resistance is increased from
16 starting and following Short circuit in Ud link 0 Ohm, proceed to the next
message is displayed: item. If it is not the case,
“UD SC” disconnect bus bars con-
necting thyristors with the Ud
link. Check the link resistance
once again. If the resistance
is equal to zero it means that
there is a short circuit in the
link Ud. Find and remove the
cause of short circuit.
Measure a thyristor link
insulation when the supply
Faulty thyristors power and DC link discon-
In current failure or in nected. Replace thyristors if
last event in status required
17 menu the following
message is displayed: Replace the unit by a known
BV6 unit is faulty
“UdNoChrg” good one
VSD is improperly ad- Contact to service specialist
justed with to configuration VSD

48
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Continuation of Table 2.4

Potential problem/
Message Probable causes
№ Remedies
on the controller dis- of message displaying
play
Check the load condition.
Ensure that
In current failure or in
“ESM rated current” value
last event in status
correspond to current
18 menu the following Motor overload
operating set value and
message is displayed:
“095 Overload set value”
“Overload”
parameter has chosen cor-
rectly
Check the “Uinput min set
value” parameter in the
“Protection/Voltage of direct
current circuit” menu.
Wrong set of the The “Uinput min set value”
“Uinput min set value” parameter shall be not
parameter exceed 380 V. If this value
In current failure or in differs from the specified
last event in status one, set the “Uinput min set
19 menu the following value” parameter no more
message is displayed: than 380 V
“Uinput min set value”
Check the input voltage
across VSD inlet using a
Supply line voltage value multimeter. If Supply line
is lower than allowable voltage value is lower than
value allowable value – exploita-
tion is not possible

Check the “Uinput max set


value” parameter in the “Pro-
tection/Voltage of
direct current circuit” menu.
Wrong set of the
The “Uinput max set value”
“Uinput max set value”
parameter shall be not ex-
In current failure or in parameter
ceed 770 V. If this value
last event in status differs from the specified
20 menu the following one, set the “Uinput max set
message is displayed: value” parameter to 770 V
“Uinput max set value”
Check the input voltage
across VSD inlet using a
Supply line voltage
multimeter. If Supply line
value is lower than al-
voltage value is lower than
lowable value
allowable value – exploita-
tion is not possible

49
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Continuation of Table 2.4

Potential problem/
Message Probable causes
№ Remedies
on the controller dis- of message displaying
play

In current failure or in Check the input voltage


Unbalance of the VSD
last event in status across VSD
supply voltage
21 menu the following inlet using a multimeter
message is displayed: Wrong set value of the Set the supply voltage value
“Uunbal” supply line voltage properly

In current failure or in
last event in status
menu the following
22 message is displayed: Fans are faulty Replace the fan
“Overheating fan”,
“Т°Ks. U” (Т°Ks. V, Т°Ks.
W)
Close door of power com-
Door of VSD is opened
partments
In current failure or in
last event in status Check the communication of
23 menu the following Circuit opening magnetic contact detectors’
message is displayed: circuit (SF1...SF2)
“Door”
Magnetic contact de-
Replace the detectors
tectors are faulty
In current failure or in
last event in status Wrong supply phase
Check the accordance of
24 menu the following sequence at VSD con-
supply cables and terminals
message is displayed: nection
“Phasing”
DME (TMS) unit has not
connected (the Down-
Connect the DME (TMS) unit
hole Measure Equip-
In current failure or in ment)
last event in status
25 menu the following The circuit connection Check the connection in
message is displayed: is open feed circuit
“DMEConn”
Check the QF6 circuit
No power supply to
breaker
DME (TMS) unit
switching-on

50
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Table 2.5 — Troubleshooting power active filter

Possible problem / Probable causes of


№ Message on the display formation of the mes- Elimination methods
controller sage
Check the connection of the
Power phases are incor- power cables to the same name
rectly connected plugs in the connection com-
partment
Undervoltage at least in Check the input voltage at the
one input phase of power input to all three phases by
APF state: circuit multimeter
1 “Not ready Accident
Phase failure” No voltage in at least one Check the input voltage at the
input phase of power input to all three phases by
circuit multimeter
Check the integrity of the wires
Interruption of measuring between the power buses and
circuits the APF electronics compart-
ment
Defective unit of APF
Replace the APF pre-charge
precharge
Check the integrity of the con-
nection between the compart-
Interruption of measuring
ment of APF inverter, APF unit
circuits
precharge and APF electronics
compartment
APF state: At powered off VSD check the
2 “Not Ready Accident Ud voltage on the link Ud of an in-
SC” verter compartment by mul-
timeter. If it doesn't equal “0”,
the link of Ud is efficient, go to
Short circuit in APF in-
the next step. If it equals “0”, to
verter compartment
check Ud link resistance. If re-
sistance increases from 0 Ohms
– go to the next step. If not –
short circuit in Ud link. Replace
the APF inverter compartment.
APF state: Faulty measurement unit
Replace the APF electronics
“Not Ready Accident Ud of Ud in APF electronics
compartment
SC” compartment

51
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table 2.5

Possible problem / Mes-


Probable causes of
№ sage on the display con- Elimination methods
formation of the message
troller
Faulty meters or IGBT
control Drivers, or IGBT Replace the APF inverter com-
modules in the compart- partment
APF state: ment of the APF inverter
3 “Not Ready Accident
Faulty capacitor of APF
OverCur” Replace the capacitor
sinewave filter
Faulty APF electronics Replace the APF electronics
compartment compartment
Short circuit at APF exit
(in the capacitor of the Replace the capacitor
APF sine-wave filter)
The alarm cable from
APF state: electronics compartment Replace the cable by service-
4 “Not Ready Accident to a APF inverter com- able one
PowSw” partment is faulty
Malfunction in a APF
inverter compartment Replace the inverter of APF
(malfunction of the IGBT compartment
module, or IGBT Driver)
Faulty main power con-
Replace the contactor
APF state: tactor of APF
5 “Not Ready Accident Ud Defective scheme of the
min” Replace the relay contactor
APF power contactor
control
control
Overheat of IGBT mod-
ules of the power active
APF state: filter owing to malfunc- Replace the fan
6 “Not Ready Accident T tion of the fan of the APF
IGBT” power modules
Faulty Driver of the APF Replace an compartment of APF
inverter compartment inverter

2.2.3.3 Checking VSD with shorted output circuit; checking IGBT

52
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

modules

CAUTION! Only Variable Speed Drives with sine-wave filters are checked!

1. Make sure that the Variable Speed Drive is shut down and powered off, connect the VSD output
phases to each other using conductors if the Drive is asynchronous or universal; or at the
external sinewave filter output if the Drive is of AC converter-fed type. The length of shorting
conductors shall be the same. The conductor cross-section shall be enough to ensure the VSD
current flow.
2. Power on the Variable Speed Drive.
3. Enter the UMKA controller’s “ Drive settings/U/f characteristics” menu. Record values of all parameters
of this menu.
4. Set point 4 voltage to 35 V. Set the “Rectifier U/F” parameter to “Yes”.
5. Make sure that the motor rated current in “Installation parameters” menu is selected equal to the VSD
rated current.
6. Set the “Maintain parameter” parameter value to 5 Hz in the main menu. Press the “START” button.
Observe the output current increase on the UMKA controller display. Then, raise the output frequency
with an increment of 2 to 3 Hz until output current is increased up to the rated value. Select the “Current
regulator” mode in the “Modes of operation” menu and set the current value equal to the VSD rated
current not stopping the Variable Speed Drive’s operation. Enter the main menu and check the VSD
output current.
7. Press the “STOP” button in 5 minutes of the VSD operation at rated current.
If “PowSw U” (“PowSw V”, “PowSw W”) failure appears on the display when performing this check,
refer to Table 2.4.

53
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2.3.4 Faults and alarm conditions
1. Checking functionality of digital (discrete) inputs.
1.1. Check if “ Inactive” is indicated as the “615 Current value” parameter’s value in the UMKA-03
controller’s “Downhole measure equipment/Contact pressure gage” menu; with active level
the “log.1” value shall be indicated.
Connect contacts 5 and 6 of the X5 terminal block using a jumper. Check if “Active” is indicated as the “615
Current value” parameter’s value in the UMKA-03 controller’s “Downhole measure equipment/ Contact
pressure gage” menu.
1.2. Power off the Variable-Speed Drive.
2. Checking relay outputs.
2.1. Press the “START” button on the UMKA-03 controller. Check if the “OPERATION” indicator is
on. Using a multimeter in the mode of checking the electrical continuity, check if the “ESM ON”
contacts (contacts 1 thru 4 of the X5 terminal block) operates. When the “START” button is
pressed, contacts 1 and 2 of the X2 terminal block shall be opened, and contacts 3 and 4 are
to be closed.
2.2. Press the “STOP” button. Contacts 1 and 2 of the X2 terminal block shall be closed, but contacts
3 and 4 are to be opened. Switch over the VSD into the automatic mode of operation. Enable
the timer operation and set the time to 1 minute. Press the “START” button. Upon expiry of
the time countdown check if the “WAIT” indicator is enabled.
2.3. Press the “STOP” button.
Switch over the Variable Speed Drive into the manual starting mode.

2.3 Operator interface. Description of UMKA-03 controller and its


operation
2.3.1 General
Information set out in this Section refers to the controller software version 33.39. Number of the software
version of your controller may be found using “386 VSDC software version” parameter in the “System”—
”VSDC parameters” menu. Revisions of this Manual may be obtained in the Triol Corporation Service
department or at the website www.triolcorp.com.

Attention! When putting a Variable Speed Drive into operation following its long-term
storage (for a month or longer) the user must upgrade the software version contacting
the Triol Corporation Service department or visiting the website www.triolcorp.com!

All the data is displayed by UMKA-03 controller on the great liquid-crystal indicator (display) with the
resolving capacity of 320 х 240 dots, which is installed in the upper part of the controller front panel.
All the messages about the state, actuation of protections, values of operating parameters, etc. are
displayed on the indicator as the text without any numerical codes or symbols which require decoding.

54
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Liquid-crystal indicator has a background illumination intended for improving the visibility under conditions
of insufficient illumination. The indicator is designed for operation within a wide range of temperatures.
If required, the contrast of the display may be controlled manually by means of changing the “Contrast”
parameter (“System” — “Display set-up” menu) or using appropriate buttons in the control module. View of
the UMKA-03 controller front panel is given in Figure 2.1. Capacity of the event log memory is 4.125 Mb. Such
a capacity offers the possibility of making 870 000 records that ensures the information saving with recording
step of 1’s over the period of 10 days.

The menu comprises 14 basic items which in turn may have some nested sub-items (second-level menu).
Description of the UMKA-03 controller menu is given in Annex D.

Figure 2.1 — Controller UMKA-03 configuration

55
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2.3.2 Description of operator interface
All the operations associated with data setting into controller, including switching between operating
modes and the motor start/stop, are fulfilled using the keyboard.
The keyboard consists of nine keys:
1. “ ” key is intended for upwards scrolling of the controller menu, for increasing the parameter
value in the editing mode, for changing over to the next record in the log view mode.
2. “ ” key is intended for downwards scrolling of the controller menu, for decreasing the parameter
value in the editing mode, for changing over to the previous record in the log view mode.
3. “ ” key is intended for changing over to the lower-level menu, for selecting the parameter
category in editing mode, for changing over to viewing the additional information in the log view
menu; for changing over from the current-state display mode to viewing graphs of the VSD’s
operating characteristics.
4. “ ” key is intended for changing over to the higher-level menu, for selecting the parameter
category in editing mode, to return to viewing events in the log view mode.
5. “ENTER” key is intended for entering the parameter-editing mode, for changing the parameter
value as well as for selecting the characteristic’s graphs.
6. “CANCEL” key is intended for exiting the editing mode without changing the parameter value; to
exit the mode of viewing the operating characteristic’s graphs as well as for changing over from
the mode of displaying the actual parameters to the menu and vice versa.
7. “START” key is intended for ESM starting.
8. “STOP” key is intended for ESM tripping.
9. “HELP” key is intended for entering the mode of the context-dependent help on each menu option.
Whatsoever item is chosen in the controller menu the following information is displayed after this
key has been pressed: name, measurement limits, default value (only for set values), address and
description of the parameter. To exit the help menu press “ ” key.
The controller has the following data display modes:
• status display mode;
• menu;
• log view mode;
• mode for viewing the graphs of the VSD’s operating characteristics.
In all the modes the following data is displayed in the status line (upper line of the controller display):
• ESM state — switched on (“Operation”) or switched off (“Stop”);
• station readiness for start-up (only when the station is shut down) “Ready”;
• operating mode (manual or automatic “Manual/Auto”);
• timer operation “Operation by timer” (only in automatic mode);
• current time.
If no message of the station readiness appears it means that at the particular moment the ESM cannot
start because the protection is active and the VSD internal delay is being debugged.
If emergency value of a parameter is exceeded the green indicator on the VSD control panel starts blinking
and the timer indication appears at the left of the controller display. The timer displays the countdown

56
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

from the moment when the emergency value has been exceeded to the moment of the Variable Speed
Drive tripping.
In the process of counting down to ARC the yellow indicator (“WAIT”) is blinking. If the protection is active
this indicator is glowing continuously (not blinking).

2.3.2.1 Entering the menu


When switching on the UMKA-03 controller a screen-saver appears which is superseded by a status window in
a minute. To go to the controller menu press any key except for the “START” and “STOP”
To select a required menu item use “ ” and “ ” keys.
The selected menu item is highlighted by inversion. Symbol “ ”, which is to say that “ ” key shall be pressed
to enter the selected sub-menu, is located to its right.
To enter the higher-level menu press “ ” key.
If there is a symbol “ ” to the right of the parameter value displayed this value may be changed. Values
of some parameters may be changed only when the motor is shut down. If such a parameter is being
programmed the motor start will be disabled until this operation has been completed.
To select a parameter to be changed use “ ” and “ ” keys.
To enter the parameter programming mode press “ENTER” key. Parameter setting will start blinking therewith.
By pressing “ ” key the parameter value is increased by “1”; by pressing “ ” key the value is decreased by “1”.
When holding the keys pressed the parameter value is increased or decreased automatically.
For numerical multi-digit parameters there has been provided a possibility of digit-by-digit editing.
Digits to be edited are selected with the help of “ ” and “ ” keys. In such a case only those digits of
the parameter value are blinking which are to be changed.
New setting of a parameter is recorded into the controller memory by pressing “ENTER” key. To exit
the programming mode not saving new value press “CANCEL” key.
By pressing “ ” key the last-selected digit is increased by “1”; by pressing “ ” key the last-selected digit is
decreased by “1”. When holding the keys pressed the last-selected digit is increased or decreased automatically.
Example: Setting of “093 Step-up tr. tap U” parameter shall be changed from 2100 V to 2440 V. To this effect
act as follows:
1. Press the key “ENTER”. All the digits of the parameter setting will start blinking therewith.
2. Press “ ” key. The first 3 digits of the parameter setting will be blinking.
3. Press “ ” key four times. The parameter setting will be changed to 2140.
4. Press “ ” key. The first 2 digits of the parameter setting will be blinking.
5. Press “ ” key three times. The parameter setting will be changed to 2440.
6. Press “ENTER” key. The parameter setting will stop blinking. New value will be saved in the
controller memory.

57
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2.3.2.2 Status display mode
View of the status window is given in Figure 2.2.
The controller display is divided into two sections. The VSD state is displayed at the left, and the
configurable list of parameters — at the right. The list is configured in the menu “System / Status set-up”.
Any controller parameter may be included into this list. Number of parameters displayed — from 1 to 32.
Operating
ESM state mode Current time
Ability
of parameter
Current failure Operation Manual F 14:48:52 editing
Operating mode Manual F
Uunbal
Deceleration method Running-out
Cause and time Frequency setting 50.00 Hz
before triping or starting Output frequency 50.00 Hz
ESM current, phase U 1000.0 A
To Stop ESM current, phase V 1000.0 A
Uunbal: ESM current, phase W 1000.0 A
Information 00:00:26 ESM active current 0.0 A
of the last event Total ESM current 1000.0 A
Freq. backspin 0.0 Hz
START: Set value 50.00 %
Operator Load factor 0.00 %
Set value 105.00 % Stripe
14:48:16 scrolling
14.04.09

Setted list of parameter

Figure 2.2 — View of the status window

2.3.3 Description of the UMKA-03 controller menu

2.3.3.1 UMKA-03 controller first-level menu


The UMKA-03 controller menu represents a structured list comprising a set of parameters divided into
groups.
Main menu (first-level menu) comprises 15 groups (Figure 2.3):
1. “Commissioning” — intended for quick start-up VSD, monitoring and setting main parameters of
VSD (alarms, inlets/outlets, PID setup, protocols, downhole tools.)
2. “ESM actual parameters” — intended for viewing the ESM operating characteristics.
3. “VSD actual parameters” — intended for viewing the VSD operating characteristics and monitoring
the mains.
4. “Modes of operation” — intended for setting the VSD operating modes as well as for controlling
the VSD output frequency.
5. “Modes of start” — allows to adjust the VSD starting mode for various conditions.
6. “Drive settings” — allows to set the VSD operating parameters and to calibrate the current and
voltage measurement circuit.
7. “Alarms” — a user may found here set values for the protections as well as parameters defining
the ARC debugging in automatic mode of operation.

58
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

8. “Downhole measure equipment” — intended for setting telemetry.


9. “Installation parameters” — contains set values characterizing particular field, cluster or well.
10. “Calc.of step-up transf.tap voltage” — allows calculating the Step-up Transformer tap voltage
automatically.
11. “System” — allows setting the system variables for the controller.
12. “Event log” — intended for viewing the controller event log as well as for changing parameters of
the information recording into the event log and its viewing. It contains data-recording and data-
scanning settings.
13. “Start-up graph” — intended for viewing startup graphs representing changes of parameters
within 30 seconds from the start.
14. “Emergency graph” — intended for viewing
The menu generic structure contains a set of parameters or a set of the second-level menu items (Figure 2.4).
In the controller there have been realized several access levels. Some menu items and parameters are
not displayed at low levels of access.

Figure 2.3 — First-level menu’s structure of the UMKA-03 controller

59
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
39

Power supply frequency

High pressure

Analog inputs of VSD controller


Analog inputs set-up
Additional analog input 1
Additional analog input 2
Additional analog input 3
Additional analog input 4
Additional analog input 5
Additional analog input 6
Tubing Head Pressure
Casing Head Pressure
Setting source
High pressure
Speed pot
Analog frequency reference
Analog current reference
Options of extension unit

Gas bag removes mode


Control mode

Power supply frequency

High pressure

Discharge temperature
ESM vibration
Pump vibration
Annulus pressure
Discharge pressure
Line pressure

Low pressure
Additional analog input 1
Additional analog input 2
Additional analog input 3
Additional analog input 4
Additional analog input 5
Additional analog input 6

60
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Figure 2.4 — General structure of UMKA-03 controller menu

2.3.3.2 “Commissioning” first-level menu


Menu “Commissioning” contains the main parameters of VSD (alarms, inlets/outlets, PID setup, protocols,
downhole tools). It comprises the following parameters:
1. “Main” parameter — indication and setup values of the VSD characteristics, such as:
More details are shown in appropriate sections of this Manual.
2. “Alarms” parameter — a user may found here set values for the protections as well as parameters
defining the ARC debugging in automatic mode of operation. It comprises the following alarms:
More details are shown in appropriate sections of this Manual.
3. “Inputs/Outputs” parameter comprises the following parameters:
More details are shown in appropriate sections of this Manual.
4. “PID Setup” parameter comprises the following parameters:
More details are shown in appropriate sections of this Manual.
5. “Communications” parameter comprises the following parameters:
6. “Downhole Tool” parameter comprises the following parameters:
More details are shown in appropriate sections of this Manual.

2.3.3.3 “ESM actual parameters” first-level menu


Menu “ESM actual parameters” comprises the following parameters:
1. 
“Output frequency” parameter — indication of values of the VSD output frequency.
2. “ESM current, phase U” parameter — indication of the motor U-phase current value calculated by
controller from the Step-up Transformer tap coefficient.
3. “ESM current, phase V” parameter — indication of the motor V-phase current value calculated by
controller from the Step-up Transformer tap coefficient.
4. “ESM current, phase W” parameter — indication of the motor W-phase current value calculated by
controller from the Step-up Transformer tap coefficient.
5. “Current unbalance” parameter — indication of the current imbalance value.
The current imbalance value is calculated by the following formula:

∆I max (2.5)
∆I = • 100%
I mean

where ΔI — current imbalance, %;


ΔImax — maximum deviation of current from its mean value, A;
Imean — arithmetic mean value of current, A.

6. “ESM active current” parameter — indication of the ESM current active component calculated by
controller from the VSD active current and the Step-up Transformer tap coefficient.

61
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
7. “Total ESM current” parameter — indication of value of the ESM current calculated by controller
from the VSD output current and the Step-up Transformer tap coefficient.
8. “Efficiency factor” parameter — indication of the motor power factor.
9. “Load factor” parameter — indication of the motor loading conditions. For this parameter to be
displayed correctly it’s necessary to set values of the ESM rated current and nominal cosine as
specified in the nameplate ratings.
Value of the loading factor is calculated by the following formula:

(2.6)

where IactESM — ESM active current, A;


Irated ESM — ESM rated current, A;
cos ESM — ESM nominal cosine.

10. “Current R ins” parameter — current value of the “Cable – ESM” insulation resistance.
11. “Freq. backspin” parameter indicates frequency of the motor turbine rotation.
12. “Active power” parameter — indication of value of the VSD output current active component.
13. “Total power” parameter — indication of the VSD total output power.
14. “Output reactive power” parameter — indicates the value of reactive power at the output of the station.
15. “ESM voltage” parameter — indication of the ESM voltage value calculated by controller from the
VSD output voltage and the Step-up Transformer tap coefficient.

2.3.3.4 “VSD actual parameters” first-level menu


The “ESM actual parameters” first-level menu comprises the following parameters:
1. “Output frequency” parameter — indication of the VSD output frequency value.
2. “Ud voltage” parameter — indication of voltage value in the frequency converter DC-link.
3. “Iout VSD phase U” parameter — value of the VSD output current in U phase.
4. “Iout VSD phase V” parameter — value of the VSD output current in V phase.
5. “Iout VSD phase W” parameter — value of the VSD output current in W phase.
6. “U filter current” parameter — value of the VSD current in U phase after filter.
7. “V filter current” parameter — value of the VSD current in V phase after filter.
8. “W filter current” parameter — value of the VSD current in W phase after filter.
9. “VSD active current” parameter — indication of value of the VSD current active component.
10. “VSD total current” parameter — indication of value of the VSD total current.
11. “RS input voltage” parameter — indication of voltage value between phases R and S (or A and B).
12. “ST input voltage” parameter — indication of voltage value between phases S and T(or B and C).
13. “TR input voltage” parameter — indication of voltage value between phases T and R (or C and A).
Output voltages are calibrated in menu “Drive settings”/”Calibration of input voltages”.
11. “In. voltage unbal.” parameter — indication of value of the phase-to-phase voltage unbalance.

62
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Value of the voltage unbalance is calculated by the following formula:

(2.7)

where U — phase-to-phase voltage unbalance, %;


ΔUmax — maximum deviation of voltage from the mean value, V;
Umean — arithmetic mean value of phase-to-phase current, V.

12. “U phase IGBT temp.” parameter — indication of temperature of the U-phase power modules cooler.
13. “V phase IGBT temp.” parameter — indication of temperature of the V-phase power modules cooler.
14. “W phase IGBT temp.” parameter — indication of temperature of the W-phase power modules cooler.
15. “Output Voltage” parameter — value of the VSD output voltage.
16. The “Id current” — display the current value of the DC.

2.3.3.5 “Modes of operation” first-level menu


Menu “Operating mode” comprises the following second-level menus:
• “Manual/Automatic”;
• I-Sync;
• “Program mode”;
• “Current regulator”;
• “Non-technol.parameter regulator”;
• “PID parameters”;
• “Operation by timer”;
• “Shaking”;
• “Current optimization”;
• “Diagnostic modes”.
In this menu item the VSD settings are adjusted so that to make them suitable for use in various
modes of operation. Moreover there is a possibility of setting and switching modes when ESM is in
operation.

“Manual/automatic” second-level menu

This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:


1. “Operating mode” parameter assigns a mode of the Variable Speed Drive operation. Actual mode
of operation is indicated also in the status line (“Manual” or “Automatic” message).
This parameter may be set to:
• “Manual” — manual mode of operation. In such a mode the Variable Speed Drive starts/stops
are performed manually. In this mode ARC and start up on VSD channel are impossible. Stop
on VSD channel is enabled;

63
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
• “Automatic” — automatic mode of operation.
In automatic mode of operation the motor may be started up both by pressing “START” key and
automatically upon expiry of the autorun delay time after the station has been powered (“073 Autorun
time” parameter) or upon expiry of the ARC delay time after one of the protections has been operated.
It can be started up remotely as well. After tripping caused by operation of a protection the automatic
reclosing is enabled if such a function is provided by the protection settings.
2. “Maintain parameter” represents a method of controlling the VSD output frequency during start
up or the actual mode during operation. This parameter may be set to:
• “Manual F” — output frequency is assigned manually with the help of “159 Frequency setting”.
• “Program. F” — output frequency is changed by the preset time program. Parameters of the time
program are given in menu “Program mode”.
• “Current regulator” — output frequency is controlled by predefined current regulation function.
Parameters of the current regulation function are given in menu “Current regulator”.
• “Suction Pressure” — output frequency is controlled by predefined intake pressure regulation
function. Set value of the pressure regulation parameter is given in menu “Non-technol.parameter
regulator”.
• “Wellhead Pressure” — output frequency is controlled by predefined buffer pressure regulation
function. Set value of the pressure regulation parameter is given in menu “Non-technol.parameter
regulator”.
• “Annulus pressure” — output frequency is controlled by predefined annulus pressure
regulation function. Set value of the pressure regulation parameter is given in menu
“Non-technol. parameter regulator”.
• “Line Pressure” — output frequency is controlled by predefined function regulating
pressure in line. Set value of the pressure regulation parameter is given in menu
“Non-technol. parameter regulator”.
• “Annulus level” — output frequency is controlled by predefined annulus level
regulation function. Set value of the level regulation parameter is given in menu
“Non-technol. parameter regulator”.
• “ESM Act Power” — output frequency is controlled by predefined ESM active power regulation
function. Set value of the active power regulation parameter is given in menu “Non-technol.
parameter regulator”.
• “ESM Pressure” — output frequency is controlled by predefined ESM pressure regulation function.
Set value of the ESM pressure regulation parameter is given in menu “Non-technol. parameter
regulator”.
• “Ambient Temp” — output frequency is controlled by predefined well temperature regulation
function. Set value of the regulation parameter is given in menu “Non-technol. parameter
regulator”.
• “ESM Temp” — output frequency is controlled by predefined ESM temperature regulation
function. Set value of the ESM temperature regulation parameter is given in menu “Non-technol.
parameter regulator”.

64
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

• “XY Vibr” — output frequency is controlled by predefined function regulating vibration in X and
Y-directions. Set value of XY-vibration regulation parameter is given in menu “Non-technol.
parameter regulator”.
• “Z Vibr” — output frequency is controlled by predefined function regulating vibration in
Z direction. Set value of Z-vibration regulation parameter is given in menu “Non-technol.
parameter regulator”.
3. 
“Direction of rotation” parameter assigns the phase sequence at the converter output
(direction of motor rotation): “Direct” setting — forward rotation; “Reverse” setting — backward
rotation.
4. “Output frequency” parameter — indication of the VSD output frequency value.
5. “Frequency setting” parameter is intended for assigning the VSD output frequency in manual
mode. This parameter indicates the frequency value which will be applied to the motor.
6. “Power-on start” parameter defines if the motor will start automatically after the power voltage
has been applied to the Variable Speed Drive. This parameter may be set to:
• “Disable” — automatic start-up is disabled;
• “Permit” — automatic start-up is enabled.
When “Disable” setting is active and if under such conditions operator or VSD issues “STOP” command
followed by the power loss the power-on start will be impossible.

Power-on start is disabled if at the moment of tripping the Variable Speed Drive was
shut down by operator or through VSD.

7.  “Autorun time” parameter defines the time upon expiration of which the motor will start after
powering up. It operates in automatic mode.
8. “Deceleration method” parameter — method of controlling the output frequency after pressing
“STOP” button. This parameter may be set to:
• “Running-out” — motor is coasting;
• “Dynamic” — ESM is slowing down by controllable decrease of the Variable Speed Drive
output frequency.
At dynamic braking the value of “Deceleration rate” parameter shall be less than the actual rate of the
motor shaft slowdown. Otherwise “Ud max” emergency may arise.
9. “Setting error” parameter indicates an error when adjusting the setting. If the error appears,
the  source of the setting must be corrected, and the error will disappear (parameter will be
switched to “Not available” option).

“I-Sync” second-level menu

The “I-Sync” mode is intended for installation of the parameters limiting starting currents at inclusion of VSD.
This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:
1. “I-Sync On\Off” parameter assigns a mode of the Variable Speed Drive operation at start-up. Actual
mode of operation is indicated also in the status line (“On” or “Off” message).

65
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2. “I-Sync amperage” information parameter displaying value of starting current in amperes.
3. “I-Sync percent” parameter allows to expose restriction of current in a percentage ratio from
motor rated current.
4. “I-Sync delay” parameter allows to expose an inclusion delay.
5. “I-Limit Prop U” parameter sets the current value limit at the start-up.

“Program mode” second-level menu

Programming mode is intended for step-by-step increasing the output frequency to the required
level. Example of the output frequency increase is given in Figure 2.5 as a graph.

F, Hz

Fend

Fch
Fstart

tch t, min
tend

where Fend — end (final) frequency;


Fch — frequency change rate;
Fstart — start frequency;
tch — time of frequency change (equals 1 min),
tend — time required for reaching the preset (end) frequency (is equal to the setting of «change
time»’ parameter)

Figure 2.5 — Graph of output frequency rise in program mode

Step of the output frequency change is calculated by the following formula:

Fend – Fstart (2.8)


Fch =
tend

where Fend — end frequency, Hz;


Fstart — start frequency, Hz;
tend — time required for reaching the preset frequency (is equal to the setting of “Change time”
parameter), min.
This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:
6. “Operating mode” represents the method of controlling the VSD output frequency at starting as
well as the actual mode of operation. This parameter may take the values described in the item
“Manual/Automatic” second-level menu. To enable the programming mode this parameter shall
be set to “Program F”.

66
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

7. “Output frequency” — indication of the VSD output frequency value.


8. “Prog. mode act. Setting” parameter defines a setting for the VSD output frequency in
programming mode. It enables not only to view the actual setting of the programming mode but
also to change it without switching to manual mode. When changing over from the programming
mode to the manual one the actual value of “Prog. mode act. setting” parameter shall be assigned
to “159 Frequency setting” parameter automatically, i.e. at this frequency VSD will be switched to
manual mode.
9. “Start. freq.” parameter — a frequency from which the programmed change of the VSD output
frequency starts. In any case the output frequency shall not exceed maximum frequency or be
lower than the minimum one. Relevant values are specified in “U/F characteristic” menu (“693
Max. freq. limit” and “516 Min. freq. limit” respectively).
10. “End freq.” parameter — a frequency at which the programmed change of the VSD output
frequency ends. In any case the output frequency shall not exceed maximum frequency or be
lower than the minimum one. Relevant values are specified in “U/F characteristic” menu (“Max.
freq. limit” and “Min. freq. limit” respectively).
11. “Change time” parameter — time required for reaching the preset frequency in programming
mode.
12. “Prog. freq. change” parameter specifies the option of the programming mode usage.
This parameter may be set to:
• “One start-up” — programming mode will be the current mode of the VSD operation until the
end frequency has been reached. Afterwards “Maintain param” parameter is set to “Manual
F” automatically.
• “Every start-up” — after reaching the end frequency the “Program” option of “Maintain param”
parameter remains active.
8. “Underload init. Setting” parameter — initial set value of the Underload current for starting
frequency of the programming mode in case when this frequency increases. If the end frequency
is lower than the starting one this set value is used for the end frequency.
If “Use other Underload set values” parameter (“Protections” first-level menu) is set to “Disabled” then
this parameter option is not used for calculating “Underload current set value” when the Variable Speed
Drive operates in programming mode.
After pressing “START” button the Variable Speed Drive reaches “Start.freq.” frequency with
acceleration rate (“Acceleration rate”). The program starts running. Frequency is changed from
“Start. freq.” to “End freq.”. Besides, there is “Prog. mode act. setting” non-volatile variable (actual setting
of frequency for programming mode) integrated into the program. In case of tripping due to failure or
loss of power VSD is restarted automatically (if autorun is enabled) after which it starts running up with
the rate of “Acceleration rate” to “Prog. mode act. setting” frequency.
Program running continues in “Program F” mode.
In the process of program running “Start. freq.” parameter may be changed.
Both automatic decrease and increase of the frequency are provided in programming mode of operation.
If program running is interrupted by tripping after which an operator or VSD restarts it the program
starts running from the very beginning (from Fstart to Fend).

67
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
“Current regulator” second-level menu

Current regulator allows limiting the VSD output current and maintaining it at a preset level.
Such limitation is performed by controlling the VSD output frequency within the range from
“Min. freq. limit” setting to “693 Max. freq. limit” setting.
This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:
1. “Maintain parameter” represents the method of controlling the VSD output frequency at starting
as well as the actual mode of operation. This parameter may take the values described in the
item “Manual/Automatic” second-level menu. To enable this mode the parameter shall be set to
“Current regulator”.
2. “Total ESM current” parameter — indication of the ESM total current value.
3. “Current setting” parameter — value of the current which is to be maintained.
Two independent algorithms of the ESM current limiting have been implemented:
• at starting;
• in operation.
Start is performed and the “ESM Turb. rot. Deceleration” (on/off) set value is enabled until the moment
when the actual value of the “Output frequency” parameter becomes equal to the “Frequency setting”
parameter. When the “Output frequency” value becomes equal to the  “Frequency setting” value, the
motor Speeding-up is assumed completed, and the “Current setting” value comes into force.

“Non-technol. parameter regulator”second-level menu

Non-technological parameter regulator allows maintaining values of the parameter selected (value is
selected using “Maintain parameter” setting) by PID control.
This menu comprises the following parameters:
1. “Maintain parameter” represents the method of controlling the VSD output frequency at starting
as well as the actual mode of operation. This parameter may take the values described in the
item “Manual/Automatic” second-level menu. To activate this mode it’s necessary to select an
adjustable parameter from the list of values.
2. “Current value PID” parameter — actual value of the parameter being supported.
3. “Setting” — setting for a parameter being supported. The value is defined by “157 Maintain parameter”.
4. “Setting error” parameter indicates an error when adjusting the setting. If an error takes place it’s
necessary to identify the setting source and the error will disappear (parameter will be switched
to “Not available” option).
5. “Intake press. setting” parameter — value of intake pressure which is to be maintained.
6. “Wellhead press. setting” parameter — value of buffer pressure which is to be maintained.
7. “Annulus press. setting” parameter — value of annulus pressure which is to be maintained.
8. “Line press. setting» parameter — value of line pressure which is to be maintained.
9. “Annulus level setting” parameter — value of the annulus liquid level which is to be maintained.
10. “Active power setting” parameter — value of active power which is to be maintained.

68
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

11. “Compensator press. setting” parameter — value of the compensator pressure which is to be
maintained.
12. “Amb. temperature setting” parameter — value of temperature in the well which is to be maintained.
13. “ESM temperature setting” parameter — value of the ESM temperature which is to be maintained.
14. “XY vibration setting” parameter — value of vibration in XY-direction which is to be maintained.
15. “Z vibration setting” parameter — value of vibration in Z-direction which is to be maintained.

“PID parameters” second-level parameter

The VSD output frequency is controlled by P-regulator (proportional), PI-regulator (proportional-integral)


or PID-regulator (proportional-integral differential) depending on the pressure.
When setting P-regulator integral and differential components shall be set to zero. When setting
PI-regulator it is the differential component which shall be set to zero.
PID-regulator is designed for maintaining equality between the actual and the preset values of the
parameter (pressure). PID-regulator controls the VSD output frequency and thereby adjusts the actual
value of the parameter being controlled (pressure) through the ESPU actuator. PID-regulator is adjusted
with the help of proportional, integral and differential coefficients.
This second-menu level comprises the following parameters:
1. “Control direction” parameter defines the direction of the frequency change at the VSD output
when the parameter value is deviating from the preset one. This parameter may be set to:
• “Direct” — direct relation of control;
• “Reverse” — inverse relation of control.
If “Direct” option is chosen then increase of the parameter preset value will cause the frequency decrease,
and decrease of the same – to increase of the frequency. If “ Reverse” option is chosen then increase of
the parameter preset value will cause the frequency increase, and decrease of the same – to decrease
of the frequency.
Example: VSD is in operation with a telemetering system connected which is used for measuring
the  intake pressure. Let us select item “Suction Pressure” for “Maintain parameter” and value of
40 atm — for “Intake press. setting”.
If telemetry informs that the pressure is 55 atm and if “Direct” option of “Control direction” para-
meter is chosen the frequency starts decreasing (down to the value not lower than the minimum one).
If “Reverse” option is set the frequency starts increasing (up to the value not exceeding the maximum one).
2. “Proportional Gain” parameter assigns a value to the PID-regulator proportional component (Cp).
The higher is this value the greater is the frequency change at the Variable Speed Drive output when
the parameter value is deviating from the preset one and, therefore, the higher is the rate of
change of the parameter current value. Too high value of the proportional component may result
in over-control and fluctuations of the current parameter preset value.
3. 
“Integral gain” parameter assigns a value to the PID-regulator integral component (Ci). This
value contributes to nullification of the averaged value of the actual parameter deviation from
the preset value and defines the rate (time) of response to the change of the parameter being
supported. The higher is the value of integral component the faster deviation of the supported

69
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
para-meter from the preset value goes to zero. Too high value of the integral component may
result in overcontrol and fluctuations of the current parameter preset value.
4. “Derivative gain” parameter assigns a value to the PID-regulator differential component
(Cd). This value impacts the output frequency change depending on the rate of change of the
parameter being supported. The faster the parameter is being changed the higher shall be the
values of proportional and integral components, the higher is the probability that the system is
overcontrolled. Differential component helps to gain stable damping of the parameter fluctuations.
Too low value of differential component results in a surge when the supported parameter is
changed stepwise, too high value of the same – in increase of the system response time.
Setting begins from proportional coefficient (Cp); integral coefficient is zero. First, it’s necessary to
assign a minimum value of Cp and to check up the result. If current value of the parameter is being
changed slowly Cp shall be increased. This operation shall be repeated until the required result is
achieved – overcontrol from 5 to 10 %. Alternatively there may be assigned a maximum value of Cp
with subsequent checking of the result. If great overcontrol or instability is observed in the system it’s
necessary to decrease the Сp value and to check up the result. If time and mode of achieving the stable
state are acceptable then setting of Cp is assumed to be completed.
Setting of integral coefficient (Ci) shall be started from setting of minimum integral value. It there are
some troubles at setting it’s necessary to decrease the Cp value. If no changes in deviation are observed
then Ci value shall be decreased. If control becomes unstable at the time, Cp value shall be decreased.
Repeat this operation until suitable parameters are set.
Setting of differential coefficient (Cd) shall be started from setting of its minimum value. Then increase
it steadily and analyze the system stabilization time. Such increase shall be performed until acceptable
stabilization time is achieved.
Impact of the regulator coefficients on the control system response are given in Table 2.6.

Table 2.6 — Effect of regulator coefficients on the reaction control system

The time
Regulator Time
of reaction Hunting Residual error
coefficient of stabilization
to the effects of
Ci Reduces Increases No effect Reduces
CP Reduces Increases Increases Nullifies
Cd Changes little Reduces Reduces Changes little

5. “Control period” parameter sets the resolution of a regulator to compare the current value with
the preset one and to correct the VSD output frequency. If information of the parameter being
supported enters the regulator discretely in certain periods of time then “165 Control period”
parameter shall be set to a value not less than the specified period.

70
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

“Operation by timer” second-level menu

This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:


1. “Prog. operation” parameter activates the mode of program operation. In such a mode the Variable
Speed Drive shall be functioning within the time specified in “191 Prog. operation time” parameter.
Then the VSD is shut down for a time specified in the “192 Prog. stop time” parameter. Such a
mode of operation is cyclical. When restoring the operation after the VSD has been tripped the
program starts running from the moment of its halting. After starting (by operator or VSD) the
countdown starts from zero.
The parameter may be set to:
• “Disable” — to disable program mode of operation;
• “With stop» — enable / disable the timer;
• “With freq. 2” — enable / disable the timer.
“Timer” message is displayed in the status line. Timer operation is performed in automatic mode.

2. “Prog. operation time” parameter defines the ESM on-state time when the Variable Speed Drive
is operated by timer.
3. “Prog. stop time” parameter defines the ESM off-state time when the Variable Speed Drive is
operated by timer.
4. “Time to start by timer”/”Time to stop by timer” parameter — indication of time remaining to
change the VSD state by timer. Parameter option is changed depending on the VSD current state.
If the station is in operation “Time to stop by timer” option will appear, if it is in a shut down state
— “Time to start by timer”.
5. “Timer state” parameter defines the Variable Speed Drive operating status by timer. May be set to
“Operation”, “Stop”. When debugging ARC for a protection the timer state may not coincide with
actual status of the Variable Speed Drive.
When the “Prog. stop time” is being counted down, the Variable Speed Drive is running with the output
frequency defined by the “F2 frequency”. Upon expiry of the running time at frequency No.2 the Variable
Speed Drive is changed over to the normal frequency setting mode (from the “159 Frequency setting”
parameter) with preset rates of Speeding-up.

“Shaking” second-level menu

Shaking (jogging) mode is intended for changing the ESM operation frequency so that to remove or
reduce amount of deposits formed on the motor in the process of operation. This second-level menu
comprises the following parameters:
1. “Shaking” parameter defines if the shaking (jogging) mode will be enabled. This parameter shall be
set to — “Disable” or “Permit”.
2. “Shaking period” parameter defines the shaking (jogging) cyclicity. Jogging period may be set to
1 — 9999 min.
3. “Amount of shakings” parameter assigns the number of frequency changes in one shaking (jogging)
cycle. Number of jogs may be set to 1 — 99.

71
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
4. “F1 frequency” parameter — level of frequency down to which the VSD output frequency will be
decreased at the beginning of the shaking (jogging) cycle.
5. “F2 frequency” parameter — level of frequency up to which the VSD output frequency will be
increased in the shaking (jogging) cycle. In any case the output frequency cannot exceed
the maximum frequency specified in “Drive settings” parameter — “U/F characteristic” — “693 Max.
freq. limit”. After adjusting the frequency preset by “F2 Frequency” parameter, the VSD frequency
will be changed over again to that preset by “F1 Frequency” parameter. After debugging all the
shaking (jogging) cycles the frequency will be changed over to that which is to be defined by the
VSD operating mode.
6. “Acceleration rate” parameter assigns the rate of the frequency increase in the shaking mode.
7. “Deceleration rate” parameter assigns the rate of the frequency decrease in the shaking mode.
8. “Time before shaking” parameter — indication of time remained to shaking.

“Current optimization” second-level menu

The current optimization mode is used for automatic search of the ESM minimum full-load current available
under the ESM current load conditions. “Current optimization” mode is enabled only when “157 Maintain
parameter” parameter is set to “Program F” or “Manual F”. Action is evolved by automatic change of a
value set by “Nominal voltage” parameter within the limits of Unom.set - Ulimit –...Unom.set + Ulimit +.
1. “Ioptim. Search” parameter defines if the current optimization mode will be enabled.
This parameter may be set to “On”, “Off”.
The Drive U/F characteristic is given in Figure 2.11, Section “U/F characteristic second-level menu”.
Current optimization implies periodic change of the Urated (nominal) value for minimizing ESM current at
the preset frequency.

2. “Limit Urated +” parameter assigns the rated voltage upper limit at rated frequency.
3. “Limit Urated –” parameter assigns the rated voltage lower limit at rated frequency.
4. “U/F curr. Urated” parameter — indication of value of the current rated output frequency.
5. “Search period” parameter — period for searching optimum value of the current rated output
frequency (U/F Urated).

Irrespective of the value assigned for this parameter the process of current optimiza-
tion is running permanently beginning from the moment of the mode enabling.

6. “Total ESM current” parameter — indication of current value of the VSD full-load current at
the high-voltage side.
7. “Optimization state” parameter represents optimization conditions. It may be set to: “Waiting”, “Decrease
U”, “Increase U”, “Off”. If it is set to “Decrease U” (“Increase U”) rated voltage (“U/F curr. Urated”) is
decreased (increased) within the limits of Urated.set - Ulimit –...Urated.set + Ulimit + with a step of 1 V.

72
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

“Diagnostic modes” second-level menu

It provides for self-testing modes of the Variable Speed Drive conditions. This second-level menu
comprises the following parameters:
1. “Test mode” parameter assigns enabling/disabling of diagnostic modes.
It may be set to:
• Off — diagnostic modes are disabled;
• Loading — loading mode enabling;
• Turbine rotation unit — mode for checking the turbine rotation unit functionality is enabled;
• Step-up transformer — step-up transformer (ACVOT) mode enabling.
2. “Step-up tr. power” parameter assigns the step-up transformer power value.
3. “SC in windings” parameter defines if the “Short circuit in windings” failure has been tested.
4. “Low-voltage side breakdown” parameter defines if the “Low-voltage side breakdown” failure has
been tested.
5. “Faulty Backspin unit” — parameter indicates a failure in the turbine rotation unit.
6. “VSD current reference (loading)” parameter — current regulator reference for loading mode.
7. “Leakage current” parameter represents the leakage current value.
8. “Leakage current set value” parameter assigns set value for the leakage current.
Loading mode
This mode is intended for generating preset currents in the VSD output circuit by inserting jumpers at
the VSD output terminals.
Insert jumpers into U, V and W output terminals connecting three phases in one point.
If “Test mode” is set to “Loading”, Variable Speed Drive will be switched to loading mode.
The “VSD current reference (loading)” option is set depending on the load jumpers cross-section and taking
into account capabilities of the incoming switch which powers the VSD, but its value cannon exceed that of
the VSD rated current. After setting the “VSD current reference (loading)” option “START” button shall
be pressed. Variable Speed Drive will be functioning in this mode automatically for one minute. If some
abnormalities are detected in the process of testing a relevant message will appear on the display screen.
If no failure is detected upon completion of testing the station will return to its initial state. “Test mode”
parameter will be disabled.
Step-up transformer operating mode
This mode is intended for identifying no-load transformer breakdowns to chassis and turn-to-turn short
circuits at low-voltage side.
Connect transformer to the Variable Speed Drive output.
If “Test mode” parameter is set to “Step-up transformer”, Variable Speed Drive is switched to the step-up
transformer (ACVOT) testing mode for identifying short circuit in windings and breakdown to chassis at
the low-voltage side. Test is conducted under no-load conditions of the transformer high-voltage side
(transformer is in no-load operation).

73
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
“379 Step-up tr. power” shall be set depending on the rated power of the step-up transformer (AC-voltage
oil transformer, ACVOT) connected to the Variable Speed Drive. “Leakage current set value” shall be set
within the limits from 5 to 50 A.
If the actual earth leakage current exceeds the above value in the step-up transformer (ACVOT)
testing mode the VSD detects breakdown of the step-up transformer (ACVOT) low-voltage side.
If the transformer testing mode is enabled the leakage current is measured indirectly from phase currents.
Over the short range of leakage currents they may be detected with low accuracy. Recommended set
value shall be 5 A or higher. Representation of leakage current is rather qualitative than quantitative.
Before enabling this mode “SC in windings” and “Low-voltage side breakdown” information parameters
shall be set to “Not tested”. To switch this mode on press “START” button. Testing will be conducted auto-
matically. Upon completion of the test “Test mode” parameter will be set to “Off”. “SC in windings” and
“Low-voltage side breakdown” parameters will be switched to “Yes” (“No”) depending on the availability/
unavailability of failures.
“Turbine rotation unit” mode
This mode is intended for testing serviceability of the turbine rotation measurement unit.
If “Test mode” is set to “Turbine rotation unit” a Variable Speed Drive is switched to the testing mode of
the turbine rotation unit.
To enable this mode the “Faulty Backspin unit” information parameter shall be set to “Not tested”.
To switch this mode on press “START” button. Testing will be conducted automatically. Upon completion of
the test “Test mode” parameter will be set to “Off”. “Faulty Backspin unit” parameter will be switched to
“Yes” (“No”) depending on the availability/unavailability of failures.

2.3.3.6 “Modes of start” first-level menu


This menu item allows setting the start-up mode for a Variable Speed Drive operating under various
conditions.
1. “Startup mode” parameter defines the VSD start-up mode.
Variable Speed Drive supports the following start-up modes:
• Soft (start);
• With synchronization;
• Jogging (Kick start);
• Swinging (start-up with reversible rotation);
• Unblocking;
• Hard (start).

At soft starting (“141 Startup mode” parameter is set to “Soft”) frequency is increased softly with a preset
run-up time up to the value assigned by reference of frequency, current or process parameter. Subsequently
the selected parameter shall be maintained.
A graph depicting the output frequency change at soft starting is given in Figure 2.6.

74
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

F, Hz
Frat

t, s

Frat – rated frequency

Figure 2.6 — Depicting the output frequency change at soft starting

At starting with synchronization (“141 Startup mode” parameter is set to “With synchronization”) the VSD
output frequency is increased with synchronization. After starting the output frequency is increased
with a preset run-up rate up to the synchronization frequency, then — for a time of synchronization —
the output frequency remains unchangeable (no increase) following which the frequency shall be
increased with a preset run-up rate up to the rated value. A graph depicting the output frequency change
at starting with synchronization is given in Figure 2.7.

where Fs — frequency with synchronization; Frat — rated frequency; ts — time of synchronization

Figure 2.7 — Depicting the output frequency change at starting with synchronization

At kick starting (“Startup mode” parameter is set to “Jogging”) a sequence of higher voltage pulses
is applied to the motor during its Speeding-up with low frequency specified by “Jog frequency”
parameter. Voltage value is defined by “Jog voltage”. Number of “kicks” is determined by
“Jog count” parameter.
A graph depicting the output frequency and frequency change at kick starting is given in Figure 2.8.
This function may be used for the ESP deblocking.

75
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
where Uk — kick voltage; Fk — kick frequency; tk — kick time; U(t) — depicting the output voltage; F(t) —
frequency change

Figure 2.8 — Depicting the output voltage and frequency change at kick starting

At starting with reversible rotation (“Startup mode” parameter is set to “Swinging”) start-up of the
Variable Speed Drive is performed intermittently with changing the direction of rotation. Before accelera-
tion a sequence of pulses, voltage of which is defined by “Jog voltage” parameter and frequency —
by “Jog frequency” parameter, shall be applied to the submersible motor.
Number of cycles of operation with reversible rotation is defined by “Jog count” parameter.
“695 Jog time” parameter shall be set to not less than 4 time intervals required for the motor to be
accelerated up to the kick frequency. We recommend adding 1–2 seconds per each “kick” to avoid sharp
acceleration or deceleration.
A graph depicting the output frequency and frequency change at starting with reversible rotation is given
in Figure 2.9. This function may be used for the ESP deblocking.

where U(t) — depicting the output voltage; F(t) — frequency change

Figure 2.9 — Depicting the output voltage and frequency change at swing starting (with reversible
rotation)

To deblock the motor there has been provided a special mode intended for achieving maximum torque
at low Speed of rotation (“Startup mode” parameter is set to “Unblocking”). When starting ESM in such

76
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

a mode, after acceleration at a frequency depending on the ESM slip frequency a current regulator
will be switched for 2 seconds that will ensure the ESM rotation at the above-specified frequency with
maintaining voltage half as much as the rated one. This will ensure a maximum torque at low frequency.
From now ESM is accelerated normally.
Parameters of start-up modes may be changed when the motor is in operation but they become valid
only during the next starting (by ARC, operator, external VSD or program). For changing operating modes
there have been provided the following parameters:

2. “Acceleration rate” parameter defines rate of the VSD output frequency increase when accelerating
the motor (Hz/s). Time to intended frequency is calculated by the following formula if automatic
control is not provided:

( ffin – fstart ) (2.9)


T=
Atemp

where T — time to intended the set frequency value at manual frequency setting, s;
ffin — intended frequency, Hz;
fstart — start frequency, Hz;
Atemp — preset acceleration rate, Hz/s.
Example: If to set 2 Hz/s the motor will be accelerated from starting frequency (1.5 Hz) to the intended
on (60 Hz) for the time T = (60-1.5)/2=29.25 s.

3. “Deceleration rate” parameter defines rate of the VSD output frequency decrease at motor
decelerating. Its principle is similar to that of “Acceleration rate” parameter. Motor deceleration
with a rate specified in “Deceleration rate” parameter is possible only if the output frequency is
controlled (is being decreased). Method of deceleration is set in “Modes of operation” – “Manual/
Automatic”– “Deceleration method”.
4. “Jog frequency” parameter defines voltage frequency when a “kick” takes place.
5. “Jog voltage” parameter defines voltage of “kicks” as a percentage of the U/F characteristic voltage
for a given frequency.
6. “Jog time” parameter defines duration of “kicks” in seconds.
7. “Jog count” parameter defines number of “kicks” or cycles of operation with reversible rotation
(with swinging).
8. 
“Sync. frequency” parameter — value of synchronization frequency for start-up with
synchronization.
9. “Sync. time” parameter — value of synchronization time for start-up with synchronization.
10. “Slip frequency” parameter — certified value of the motor slip frequency.
11. “Unlocking” parameter provides the possibility of enabling/disabling the VSD start. If this parameter
is set to “On” a Variable Speed Drive may be started only through VSD or manually by operator
provided that “Locked” parameter is set to “No” (i.e. unlocked).

77
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
12. “Locked” parameter provides the possibility of disabling the VSD start. If station is locked it may be
started only through VSD or manually by operator who may unlock the Variable Speed Drive by
entering into the system as the “Processman” using appropriate password.
Hard start of the motor (“Startup mode” parameter is set to “Hard”) is performed as follows: after pres-
sing “START” button the VSD output frequency and voltage start increasing as per adjusted U/F characte-
ristic with a rate specified by “Acceleration rate” parameter. If output frequency reaches the level of
deblocking one (“Unblocking frequency” parameter) output voltage is increased by a value specified by
“Voltage rise factor” parameter with a rate specified by “Voltage rise rate” parameter. Rate of frequency
increase is also changed to that specified by “Acceleration rate (hard start)” parameter. Lifetime of
increased voltage and different rate of acceleration is set by “Voltage rise time” parameter, but in any
case it expires when output frequency reaches the value of 40 Hz.
As regards the impact on the motor this mode if appropriately set may be approximated to the motor
direct-on-line starting to the extent possible.
This function is intended for deblocking electric submersible pump.
Graphs depicting changes in output frequency as well as in output voltage and frequency at starting in
hard mode are given in Figure 2.10 (a and b).

where tu – voltage rise time

Figure 2.10 — Output frequency change (a) and output voltage change (b) when starting in hard mode

If “141 Startup mode” is set to “Hard” the following parameters are accessible:
1. “Acceleration rate” parameter defines rate of the VSD output frequency increase when accelera-
ting the motor (Hz/s).
2. “Deceleration rate” parameter defines rate of the VSD output frequency decrease at motor
decelerating. Its principle is similar to that of “Acceleration rate” parameter. Deceleration rate is
calculated by formula 2.9. Motor deceleration with a rate specified in “Deceleration rate” parameter
is possible only if the output frequency is controlled (is being decreased). Method of deceleration
is set in “Modes of operation” — “Manual/Automatic” — “Deceleration method” menu.
3. 
“Acceleration rate (hard start)” parameter assigns the acceleration rate for hard start.
Recommended value for this parameter is 10 – 50 Hz/s.

78
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

4. “Voltage rise factor” parameter assigns value of the voltage rise factor. For this parameter we
recommend to use factory setting.
5. “Unblocking frequency” parameter assigns the unblocking frequency value. For this parameter we
recommend to use factory setting.
6. “Voltage rise rate” parameter assigns value of the voltage increase rate. For this parameter we
recommend to use factory setting.
7. “Voltage rise time” parameter defines the voltage increase time. For this parameter we recommend
to use factory setting.
8. “Unlocking” parameter provides the possibility of enabling/disabling the VSD start. If this parameter
is set to “On” a Variable Speed Drive may be started only through VSD or manually by operator
provided that “Locked” parameter is set to “No” (i.e. unlocked).
9. “Locked” parameter provides the possibility of disabling the VSD start. If station is locked it may be
started only through VSD or manually by operator who may unlock the Variable Speed Drive by
entering into the system as the “Process man” using appropriate password.
Parameters of start-up modes may be changed when the motor is in operation but they become valid
only during the next starting (by ARC, operator, external VSD or program).

79
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2.3.3.7 “Drive settings” first-level menu
“Drive settings” menu contains the following second-level menus:
• “U/F characteristic”;
• “Calibration of ESM currents”;
• “Calibration of input voltages”.

“U/F characteristic” second-level menu

Values defining relationship between VSD frequency and voltage if frequency is adjustable
(U/F characteristic) are set in this second-level menu. A graph depicting the shape of U/F characteristic is
given in Figure 2.11.

where Fstart-up — start up frequency; U1 — initial voltage; F1 — initial frequency; F2 — frequency of the
breakpoint;
U2 — voltage of the breakpoint; F3 — rated frequency; U3 — rated voltage; F4 — maximum frequency.

Figure 2.11 — Diagram of depicting the U/F characteristic shape

The following parameters are provided for changing the U/F characteristic:
1. 
“Starting frequency” parameter — minimum output frequency generated by VSD
(point Fstart-up in Figure 2.13).
2. “Point 1 frequency” parameter — defines value of frequency corresponding to the first breakpoint
of U/F characteristic (point F1 in Figure 2.13).
3. “Point 1 Voltage” parameter — VSD output voltage at F1 frequency (point U1 in Figure 2.13).
4. “Point 2 frequency” parameter — defines value of frequency corresponding to the second
breakpoint of U/F characteristic (point F2 in Figure 2.13).
5. “Point 2 Voltage” parameter — VSD output voltage at F2 frequency (point U2 in Figure 2.13).
6. “Point 3 frequency” parameter — defines value of frequency corresponding to the third breakpoint
of U/F characteristic (point F3 in Figure 2.13).
7. “Point 3 Voltage” parameter — VSD output voltage at F3 frequency (point U3 in Figure 2.13).
8. “Point 4 frequency” parameter — defines value of frequency corresponding to the fourth breakpoint
of U/F characteristic (point F4 in Figure 2.13).

80
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

9. “Point 4 Voltage” parameter — VSD output voltage at F4 frequency (point U4 in Figure 2.13).
10. “Min. freq. limit” parameter set minimal frequency, which may take place at VSD output during
frequency regulating factor.
11. “Max. freq. limit” parameter set maximal frequency which may take place at VSD output.
12. “Rectifier U/F” parameter — rectify U/F.
In any case only qualified personnel may be authorized to change U/F characteristic.

“ESM currents calibration” second-level menu

The “ESM current, phase U”, “ESM current, phase V”, “ESM current, phase W” parameters
represent actual values of ESM currents. Besides, they enable the user to calibrate measuring channel.
Calibration is performed at rated frequency under no-load conditions by entering values measured by
АРРА 39R clamp-on ammeter (measuring inaccuracy ± (1.9 % + 2 units) or by a similar instrument.
1. “ESM current, U phase” parameter — indication of U-phase motor current.
2. “Cur. comp. factor phase U” parameter — U-phase current compensation factor.
3. “ESM current, V phase” parameter — indication of V-phase motor current.
4. “Cur. comp. factor phase V” parameter — V-phase current compensation factor.
5. “ESM current, W phase” parameter — indication of W-phase motor current.
6. “Cur. comp. factor phase W” parameter — indication of W-phase motor current.
7. “Full-load current” parameter — indication of full-load motor current.
8. “FL cur. comp. factor” parameter — full-load W-current compensation factor.

“Input voltages calibration” second-level menu

1. 
The “RS in. voltage”, “ST in. voltage” and “TR in. voltage” parameters represent
actual values of phase-to-phase voltages and enable the user to calibrate measuring channel.
Calibration is performed at the input voltage applied by entering a value measured by multimeter
АРРА 91 (measuring inaccuracy ± (1,3 % + 4 units) or by a similar instrument.
2. “ADC comp. Urs”, “ADC comp. Ust”, “ADC comp.Utr” parameters — voltage compensation factors.
Mains voltage measuring channels are calibrated in this menu.
Calibration may be performed in two ways:
1. By entering measured values for parameters 018—020 (more convenient method).
2. By entering compensation factors in percentage terms for parameters 671—677.

Adjustment range is 50—200 % of the actual measured value when using any method of calibration.

81
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2.3.3.8 “Alarms” first-level menu
This menu contains parameters defining operation algorithms of protections against inadmissible
deviations of ESM & VSD performance characteristics. Settings make it possible to debug ARC when
the station operates in automatic mode.
It contains the following second-level menus:
• “Overload”;
• “Underload”;
• “Current unbalance”;
• “Insulation”;
• “Frequency Backspin”;
• “Low line voltage”;
• “High line voltage”;
• “Unbalance of line voltage”;
• “Voltage of direct current circuit”;
• “Power switches overheating”;
• “Overcurrent”;
• “Power switches”;
• “Low frequency”;
• “Door”;
• Field Kill;
• “Connection with ACS”
• “Connection with DME” (TMS communication);
• “ARC counters”.

“Overload” second-level menu

1. “Total ESM current” parameter — indication of the ESM effective current.


2. “Overload set value in percent” parameter — set value of overload current as a percentage of
the ESM rated current (“Installation parameters”, “ESM rated current” option) upon reaching or
exceeding of which overload protection operates.
3. “Overload setpoint” parameter — set value of overload current as in amperes of the ESM rated
current (“Installation parameters”, “ESM rated current” option) upon reaching or exceeding of
which overload protection operates.
4. “Starting time” parameter assign time within which the protection is disabled beginning from
the moment when motor starts running up.
5. “Overload trip delay” parameter — delay time of ESM tripping caused by overload protection when
the VSD output current exceeds the value set by “ESM rated current” parameter. Tripping time
depends on the rate of current rise: the higher is the VSD output current as compared with that
set by “ESM rated current” parameter, the faster tripping will take place.
6. “Protection” parameter assigns one of three possible options of the protection operation:

82
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

• “Off” — protection is disabled;


• “Lockout” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it cannot be switched on again
until it is started by operator or through VSD;
• “Automatic restart” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it can be switched on
again in a time set by “Restart delay” parameter.
7. “Number of overload restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM tripping by overload protection.
If “099 Number of restarts” parameter is set to zero it means that number of ARC is not limited.
8. “Overload restart delay” parameter — delay time to ARC after ESM tripping by overload protection.
9. “Fast trip” parameter enables the mode of fast overload tripping.
Sequence of operations for enabling the mode of fast overload tripping.
1. “Fast trip parameter shall be set to “Permit”.
2. Insulation resistance level control is on: “Protection” parameter shall be set to “Off”.
3. ESM actual current exceeds the overload set value: value of “ESM full-load corr. cur” parameter
exceeds that set by “Overload set value” parameter”.
The ESM overload tripping will be performed notwithstanding the time (“Stop delay” parameter) provided
that all three above-mentioned conditions are observed.
Fast tripping takes place when the insulation resistance protection of the “Cable–ESM” —
“Protection” parameter” system is enabled (“Insulation” second-level menu).
If this protection operates an appropriate message is displayed (“Overload”).
The protection is intended for tripping the electric motor when ESM is jammed. That’s why values of
“ESM rated current” and “Step-up tr. tap U” parameters shall be set in line with the submersible motor
rated current (“Installation parameters” first-level menu) to ensure proper functioning of the overload
protection.

“Underload” second-level menu

1. “Total ESM current” parameter — indication the value of the total current ESM.
2. “Load factor” parameter — indication of the ESM load factor. It is calculated by formula 2.6
(“ESM actual parameters” first-level menu.)
3. “Underload Current set value” parameter — underload (TUL) set value in different modes of
the VSD operation may be recalculated (for example, programmed frequency change). This para-
meter represents an actual value as compared with the underload (TUL) set value.
4. “Underload set value in percent” parameter — underload (TUL) set value in percentage terms. This
protection is intended for tripping the no-loaded electric motor.

83
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Minimum set value of the trip on underload (TUL) entered into controller is calculated automatically and
is limited by a value defined by the following formula:

1.3 x Ino-load x 0.35 (2.10)


Downloadmin= x 100 %
Ia rated

where Ino-load — is no-load current, A (“Idle motor rated cur” parameter, “Installation parameters” menu);
Iа rated — is active rated (nominal) current, A.
cos (2.11)
a rated rated ESM

5. “Underload setpoint” parameter — underload (TUL) set value in amperes terms. This protection is
intended for tripping the no-loaded electric motor.
6. “Starting time” parameter assign time within which the protection is disabled beginning from
the moment when motor starts running up.
7. “Underload trip delay” parameter — delay time of ESM tripping caused by operation of underload
protection. Motor will be shut down if within this time the VSD active current is lower than that set
by “Underload current” parameter.
8. “Protection” parameter assigns one of three possible options of the protection operation:
• “Off” — protection is disabled;
• “Lockout” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it cannot be switched on again
until it is started by operator or through VSD;
• “Automatic restart” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it can be switched on
again in a time set by “105 Restart delay” parameter.
6. “Number of underload restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM has been tripped on
underload. If “Number of underload restarts” parameter is set to zero it means that number of
ARC is not limited.
7. “Underload restart delay” parameter — ARC delay time after ESM has been tripped on underload.
8. “Setting delay ARS” parameter represents a value set by ACS, USB or Operator.
9. “Time Progres ARS” parameter represents time delta of the ARC progressive delay.

“Current unbalance” second-level menu

1. “Current unbalance” parameter — indication of the VSD actual current imbalance in percentage
terms. Referencing starts from the rated value if currents do not exceed the same. If current
exceeds its rated value referencing starts from its maximum value.
2. “VSD input current unbalance” parameter is actual imbalance of input currents.
3. “Cur. unbal. set value” parameter defines the VSD maximum allowable current imbalance in
percentage terms. If such an imbalance exceeds the preset value ESM will be tripped.
4. “Starting time” parameter assigns time within which the protection is disabled beginning from
the moment when motor starts running up.

84
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

5. “Stop delay” parameter — delay time for operation of the current imbalance protection.
6. “Protection” parameter assigns one of three possible options of the protection operation:
• “Off” — protection is disabled;
• “Lockout” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it cannot be switched on again
until it is started by operator or through VSD;
• “Automatic restart” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it can be switched on
again in a time set by “Stop delay” parameter.
7. “Number of restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM tripping caused by current imbalance.
If “Number of restarts” parameter is set to zero it means that number of ARC is not limited.
8. “Restart delay” parameter — ARC delay time after the parameter has been restored.
If this protection operates an appropriate message is displayed “CurrUnb”. This protection is
intended for protecting ESM against phase imbalance.

“Insulation” second-level menu

1. “Current Rins” parameter — calibration of the measuring channel of insulation resistance.


2. “R ins set value” parameter — set value of the insulation resistance. Motor will be shut down if
within resistance value is lower this value (ARC is possible).
3. “Protection” parameter assigns one of three possible options of the protection operation:
• “Off” — protection is disabled;
• “Lockout” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it cannot be switched on again
until it is started by operator or through VSD;
• “Automatic restart” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it can be switched on
again in a time set by “Restart delay” parameter.
4. “Starting time” parameter — delay of insulation resistance control after start of VSD.
5. “OFF time” parameter — delay of shut down after “Insulation resistance” protection activation.
6. “Number of restarts” parameter — number of automatic restarts after “Insulation resistance”
protection activation.
7. “Restart delay” parameter — delay of automatic restart after “Insulation resistance” protection
activation.
8. “Ris Comp Coefficient” parameter — calibration factor of the measuring channel of insulation
resistance. It is better not to use this parameter for manual calibration.
If this protection operates an appropriate message is displayed “Rinsul.”.

“Frequency Backspin” second-level menu (Turbine rotation)

This second-level menu contains parameters used for setting the ESM start-up at turbine rotation, turbine
rotation protection and catch-on-the-fly mode.
Turbine rotation is identified when the motor is on. Turbine rotation appears during the motor reverse
rotation under the influence of liquid flowing through the pump.
Two modes of operation are available in case of turbine rotation:

85
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
1. ESM protection against starting in case of turbine rotation (defined by “Protection” parameter).
2. ESM “catch-on-the-fly” in case of turbine rotation.
“Catch-on-the-fly” algorithm is based on the principle of current control (starting current limitation) by
changing the Variable Speed Drive output frequency.
Motor start-up in the “catch-on-the-fly” mode is performed if “ESM Turb. rot. Deceleration” para-
meter is set to “On” (i.e. enabled) and the motor start-up mode — to “Soft”. “Catch-on-the-fly” mode is
assumed to be completed successfully if the Variable Speed Drive has reached the reference frequency
(its value is defined by “159 Frequency setting”).

“Frequency Backspin” menu contains the following parameters:

1. “Direction catch on the fly” parameter types of algorithms, which “catch-on-the-fly” mode perform:
• using a value of the turbine frequency of rotation;
• not using a value of the turbine frequency of rotation. If “Catch-on-the-fly” is enabled,
the turbine rotation protection must be disabled.
2. “Freq. backspin” parameter indicates the turbine rotation frequency.
3. “Fmax set value” parameter defines a value of the turbine rotation frequency exceedance of
which results in impossibility of the Variable Speed Drive start-up if a turbine rotation takes place.
Too high value of this setting may cause the VSD or ESM overload.
4. “Protection” parameter assigns one of two options of the protection operation:
“Off” — protection is disabled; “On” — protection is enabled.
5. “ESM Turb. rot. Deceleration” parameter authorizes deceleration and a subsequent increase of
frequency up to the preset value with maintaining the ESM currents at the level not exceeding
the specified ratio. This mode is valid only at soft starting.
6. “COTF Number of ARS” parameter — number of AR after ESM has been tripped by turbine rotation
protection.
7. “COTF Restart delay” parameter — AR delay after an attempt to perform “catch-on-the-fly”.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“Turbine”) shall appear on the controller
display.
8. “I-Sync On\Off” parameter assigns a mode of the Variable Speed Drive operation at start-up. Actual
mode of operation is indicated also in the status line (“On” or “Off” message).
9. “I-Sync amperage” information parameter displaying value of starting current in amperes.
10. “I-Sync percent” parameter allows to expose restriction of current in a percentage ratio from motor
rated current.
11. “I-Sync delay” parameter allows to expose an inclusion delay.
12. “I-Limit Prop U” parameter sets the current value limit at the start-up.

86
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

“Low line voltage” second-level menu (Low supply voltage)

1. “RS input voltage” parameter — actual value of line voltage between phases R and S (A and B).
2. “ST input voltage” parameter — actual value of line voltage between phases S and T (B and C).
3. “TR input voltage” parameter — actual value of line voltage between phases T and R (C and A).
4. “U input min set value” parameter defines minimum acceptable voltage of the supply line, at the
rated voltage of 380 V. If the supply line voltage drops below the preset value ESM is tripped.
5. “U input min set value (480 V)” parameter defines minimum acceptable voltage of the supply line,
at the rated voltage of 480 V. If the supply line voltage drops below the preset value ESM is tripped.
6. “Starting time” parameter assigns time within which the protection is disabled beginning from
the moment when motor starts running up.
7. “Stop delay” parameter — delay time for operation of the inadmissible line voltage protection.
8. “Protection” parameter assigns one of three possible options of the protection operation:
• “Off” — protection is disabled;
• “Lockout” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it cannot be switched on again
until it is started by operator or through VSD;
• “Automatic restart” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it can be switched on
again in a time set by “Stop delay” parameter.
8. “Restart time” parameter — defines the start-up delay time after powering up as well as the ARC
time after operation of the input voltage protections.
9. “Volt. Number of restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM tripping by supply-line voltage
protection. If “531 Volt. Number of restarts” parameter is set to zero it means that number of ARC
is not limited.

“High line voltage” second-level menu (High supply voltage)

1. “RS input voltage” parameter — actual value of line voltage between phases R and S (A and B).
2. “ST input voltage” parameter — actual value of line voltage between phases S and T (B and C).
3. “TR input voltage” parameter— actual value of the mains TR (CA) voltage.
4. “U input max set value” parameter defines a maximum allowable voltage in the supply line, at the
rated voltage of 380 V. If this value is exceeded ESM will be tripped.
5. “U input max set value (480 V)” parameter defines a maximum allowable voltage in the supply line,
at the rated voltage of 480 V. If this value is exceeded ESM will be tripped.
6. “Starting time” parameter assigns time within which the protection is disabled beginning from
the moment when motor starts running up.
7. “Stop delay” parameter — delay time to tripping by protection against unacceptable supply line
voltage.
8. “Protection” parameter assigns one of three possible options of the protection operation:
• “Off” — protection is disabled;
• “Lockout” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it cannot be switched on again
until it is started by operator or through VSD;

87
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
• “Automatic restart” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it can be switched on
again in a time set by “063 Stop delay” parameter.
8. “Restart time” parameter — assigns the start-up delay time after powering up as well as the ARC
time after operation of the input voltage protections.
9. “Volt. Number of restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM tripping by mains supply voltage
protection. If “Volt. Number of restarts” parameter is set to zero it means that number of ARC is not
limited.

“Unbalance of line voltage” second-level menu (Supply voltage unbalance)

1. “RS input voltage” parameter — actual value of line voltage between phases R and S (A and B).
2. “ST input voltage” parameter — actual value of line voltage between phases S and T (B and C).
3. “TR input voltage” parameter — actual value of line voltage between phases T and R (C and A).
4. “In. voltage unbal.” parameter — indication of input voltage actual unbalance.
5. “Line Unbal. set value” parameter defines a maximum allowable voltage unbalance in the supply
line. If this value is exceeded ESM will be tripped.
6. “Starting time» parameter assigns time within which the protection is disabled beginning from
the moment when motor starts running up.
7. “Stop delay” parameter — delay time to tripping by protection against inadmissible supply line
voltage unbalance.
8. “Protection” parameter assigns one of three possible options of the protection operation:
• “Off” — protection is disabled;
• “Lockout” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it cannot be switched on again
until it is started by operator or through VSD;
• “Automatic restart” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it can be switched on
again in a time set by “Stop delay” parameter.
9. “Restart time” parameter — defines the start-up delay time after powering up as well as the ARC
time after operation of the input voltage protections.
10. “Volt. Number of restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM tripping by line-voltage unbalance
protection. If “Volt. Number of restarts” parameter is set to zero it means that number of ARC is
not limited.
If this protection operates an appropriate message “Uunbal” is displayed.

“Voltage of direct current circuit” second-level menu (DC link voltage)

1. “Ud voltage” parameter — indication of the VSD DC-link voltage.


2. “Min Ud set value” parameter defines a minimum allowable voltage in DC link (Ud), at rated voltage
380 V. If Ud falls below this value ESM will be tripped and an appropriate message (“Ud min”) will
appear on the controller display.

88
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

3. “Max Ud set value” parameter defines a maximum allowable voltage in DC link (Ud), at rated voltage
380 V. If Ud exceeds this value ESM will be tripped and an appropriate message (“Ud max”) will
appear on the controller display.
4. “Min Ud set value (480 V)” parameter defines a minimum allowable voltage in DC link (Ud), at rated
voltage 480 V. If Ud falls below this value ESM will be tripped and an appropriate message (“Ud
min”) will appear on the controller display.
5. “Max Ud set value (480 V)” parameter defines a maximum allowable voltage in DC link (Ud), at
rated voltage 480 V. If Ud exceeds this value ESM will be tripped and an appropriate message (“Ud
max”) will appear on the controller display.
6. “Number of restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM tripping by DC-link voltage protection.
If “Number of restarts” parameter is set to zero it means that number of ARC is not limited.
7. “Restart delay” parameter — delay time to ARC after ESM has been tripped by DC link voltage
protection.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“Ud min” or “Ud max”) shall appear
on the controller display.

“Power switches overheating” second-level menu

1. “U phase IGBT temp.” parameter — indication of power modules temperature in phase U.
2. “V phase IGBT temp.” parameter — indication of power modules temperature in phase V.
3. “W phase IGBT temp.” parameter — indication of power modules temperature in phase W.
4. “OFF temp.IGBT “ parameter — maximum allowable temperature of the Variable Speed Drive power
modules. If this value is exceeded the Variable Speed Drive will be tripped by power modules
overheating protection. Appropriate value is set by manufacturer and it can be changed only by
qualified personnel.
5. “Protection” parameter assigns one of two possible options of the protection operation:
• “Lockout” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it cannot be switched on again
until it is started by operator or through VSD;
• “Automatic restart” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it can be switched on
again in a time set by “Restart delay” parameter;
7. “Number of restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM tripping by power-switch overheating
protection. If “Number of restarts” parameter is set to zero it means that number of ARC is not
limited.
8. “Restart delay” parameter — delay time to ARC after ESM tripping by power-switch over-heating
protection.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“Т°Sw. U”, “Т°Sw. V”, “Т°Sw. W”) shall appear on
the controller display.

89
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
“Overcurrent” second-level menu (Overcurrent Protection, OCP)

1. “VSD total current” parameter — indication of the VSD full-load (total) current actual value.
2. “Overcurrent setting during operation” parameter represents the overcurrent (MTZ , OCP) set value.
3. “Protection” parameter — VSD response to overcurrent protection activation; parameter assigns
one of two possible options of the protection operation:
• “Lockout” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it cannot be switched on again
until it is started by operator or through VSD;
• “Automatic restart” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it can be switched on
again in a time set by “Restart delay” parameter.
4. “Number of restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM tripping by overcurrent protection.
If “Number of restarts” parameter is set to zero it means that number of ARC is not limited.
5. “Restart delay” parameter — ARC delay time after the parameter has been restored.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“Overcurrent”) is displayed.

“Power switches” second-level menu

1. 
“Number of restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM tripping by power-switch
overcurrent protection. Zero value of this parameter corresponds to ARC “locking”.
2. “Restart delay” parameter — delay time to ARC after ESM tripping by power switch protection.
3. “Protection” parameter assigns one of two possible options of the protection operation:
• “Lockout” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it cannot be switched on again
until it is started by operator or through VSD;
• “Automatic restart” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it can be switched on
again in a time set by “Restart delay” parameter.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“PowSw R”, “PowSw S”, “PowSw T”) shall appear on
the controller display.

“Low frequency” second-level menu

1. “Output frequency” parameter — indication of the VSD output frequency.


2. “Min. frequency” parameter — VSD minimum acceptable operating frequency. If the VSD output
frequency is equal to or lower than this set value as a result of the pressure/current controller
(regulator) operation the motor will be tripped and an appropriate message (“MinFreq”) will
appear on the controller display. If one of the controllers (regulators) is selected as a source for
setting output frequency, such a controller will start running only if the VSD output frequency exceeds
the preset value.
3. “Starting time” parameter assigns time within which the protection is disabled beginning from
the moment when motor starts running up. This value shall not be less than the time required for
the motor to get up rated Speed.
4. “Stop delay” parameter — delay time for ESM tripping by low-frequency protection.
5. “Protection” parameter assigns one of three possible options of the protection operation:

90
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

• “Off” — protection is disabled;


• “Lockout” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it cannot be switched on again
until it is started by operator or through VSD;
• “Automatic restart” — after the motor has been tripped by a protection it can be switched on
again in a time set by “Restart delay” parameter.
6. “Number of restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM tripping by low frequency protection.
If “537 Number of restarts” parameter is set to zero it means that number of ARC is not limited.
7. “Restart delay” parameter — delay time to ARC after ESM has been tripped by low-frequency
protection.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“MinFreq”) is displayed.

“Door” second-level menu

1. 
“Electric interlock” parameter — enabling the protection against unauthorized opening of
the VSD power-equipment compartment door. This parameter may be set to:
• “On” — parameter checkout is enabled;
• “Off” — parameter checkout is disabled.
2. “Door” parameter — indication of current state of the power-equipment compartment doors.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“Door”) shall appear on the controller display.
3. “Automatic OFF VSD at door open” parameter — this parameter allows enable/disable the function
of automatic shutdown of the incoming VSD switch when the doors open.

“Field Kill” second-level menu

1. “Field Kill Source” parameter — allows to set discrete signal source from which the protection will
be practiced. The value may be set to: DIN1, DIN2, DIN3 - digital inputs UMKA-03;
2. “Active level” parameter — allows to set a discrete value of the signal on which the protection will
operate. The value can be “0” and “1”;
3. “Protection” parameter — allows to enable or disable protection

“Connection with ACS” second-level menu (Connection with Automated control system)

1. “Protection ACS” parameter — enabling the protection against loss of communication between
controller and Automated control system (ACS).
This parameter may be set to:
• “On” — parameter checkout is enabled;
• “Off” — parameter checkout is disabled.
2. “OFF time” parameter — delay time for ACS tripping caused by this protection when actual value
of the parameter goes beyond the upper or lower limit.
3. “Number of restarts” parameter — number of restarts after ACS is tripped by this protection.
4. “Restart delay” parameter — ACS delay time after the parameter has been restored.

91
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
“Connection with DME” second-level menu (Connection with telemetering system)

1. “Protection DME” parameter — enabling the protection against loss of communication between
controller and telemetry system (DME).
This parameter may be set to:
• “On” — parameter checkout is enabled;
• “Off” — parameter checkout is disabled.
2. “OFF time” parameter — delay time for DME tripping caused by this protection when actual value
of the parameter goes beyond the upper or lower limit.
3. “Number of restarts” parameter — number of restarts after DME is tripped by this protection.
4. “Restart delay” parameter — DME delay time after the parameter has been restored.

“Connection with ADAM” second-level menu (Analog Input Module)

1. “Protection ADAM” parameter — enabling the protection against loss of communication between
controller and ADAM (AIM).
This parameter may be set to:
• “On” — parameter checkout is enabled;
• “Off” — parameter checkout is disabled.
2. “OFF time” parameter — delay time for ADAM tripping caused by this protection when actual value
of the parameter goes beyond the upper or lower limit.
3. “Number of restarts” parameter — number of restarts after ADAM is tripped by this protection.
4. “Restart delay” parameter — ADAM delay time after the parameter has been restored.

“ARC counters” second-level menu

1. “ARC counters” parameter assigns a possibility for forced resetting of ARC counters.
It may be set to:
• “Clear” — counter reset is enabled;
• “Do not clear” — counter reset is disabled.
2. “ARSCountResetVolt” parameter assigns ARC number counter reset time. If no trip caused by
low-voltage, high-voltage or voltage-unbalance protection happens within this time, ARC number
counter will be reset.
3. “ARSCountResetOverload” parameter assigns ARC number counter reset time. If no trip caused by
overload protection happens within this time, ARC number counter will be reset.
4. “ARSCountResetUnderload” parameter assigns ARC number counter reset time. If no Underload
(TUL) happens within this time, ARC number counter will be reset.
5. “ARSCountResetCurUnbal” parameter assigns ARC number counter reset time. If no trip caused by
current imbalance protection happens within this time, ARC number counter will be reset.
6. “ARSCountResetOther” parameter assigns ARC number counter reset time. If no trip caused by
other protections happens within this time, ARC number counter will be reset.

92
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

7. “TimeToCountResetVolt” parameter — time to ARC counter reset after tripping caused by low-
voltage, high-voltage or voltage-unbalance protection.
8. “TimeToCountResetOverload” parameter — time to ARC counter reset after tripping caused by
overload protection.
9. “TimeToCountResetUnderload” parameter — time to ARC counter reset after tripping caused by
Underload (TUL) protection.
10. “TimeToCountResetCurUnbal” parameter — time to ARC counter reset after tripping caused by
current imbalance protection.
11. “TimeToCountResetOther” parameter — time to ARC counter reset after tripping caused by other
protections.
12. “ARSnumbCounterOverload” parameter — counter of ARC after tripping by overload protection.
13. “ARSnumbCounterUnderload” parameter — counter of ARC after tripping by underload protection.
14. 
“ARSnumbCountCurUnbal” parameter — counter of ARC after tripping by current imbalance
protection.
15. 
“ARSCountReset Manual” parameter — reset of ARC number counter at manual starting
(by “Operator” or through “VSD”). It may be set to:
• “Permit” — counter reset is enabled;
• “Disabled” — counter reset is disabled.

93
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2.3.3.9 “Downhole measure equipment” first-level menu (Telemetry)
This menu contains the telemetry settings and includes the following second-level menus:
• “Analog inputs set-up”;
• “Downhole Tool”;
• “Intake pressure” (Pump suction pressure);
• “Compensator pressure”;
• “Amb. Temperature”;
• “ESM oil temperature”;
• “Vibration”;
• “Annulus pressure”;
• “Buffer pressure”;
• “Line pressure”;
• “Annulus fluid level”;
• “Contact pressure gauge”;
• “Delivery rate”;
• “Additional analog input 1”;
• “Additional analog input 2”.

“Analog inputs set-up” second-level menu

The UMKA-03 controller provides for software & hardware switching of transducer types. All the controller
analog inputs are divided into two isolated groups (8 + 4). If a type of transducers is changed it refers to
the group as a whole. To this effect it’s necessary to change only the setting — hardware switching
(inserting external resistors and jumpers) is not required.
Ain.1 group contains 8 analog inputs and is intended for connecting DME (telemetering system).
On the  VSD user terminal block these inputs are identified as Ain1.1...Ain1.8 (“Intake pressure”,
“Compensator pressure”, “Amb. Temperature”, “ESM oil temperature”, “Vibration”).
Ain.2 group contains 4 analog inputs and is intended for connecting well-head transducers (“Annulus
pressure”, “Buffer pressure”, “Line pressure”, “Annulus fluid level”).
This second-level menu contains parameters for setting analog inputs:
1, 2) “Ain.Input type 1(Ainх. 1–8)”, “Ain.Input type 2 (Ain. 9–12)” parameters define type of a signal which
a particular analog input is designed for. Type of a signal may be changed only when the motor is shut
down. Analog inputs of the controller may be set to the following types of signals: 0—10 V; 0—5 mA;
4—20 mA.

“DME set-up” second-level menu (Telemetry setting)

This second-level menu contains the following parameters:


1. “Status” parameter — connected telemetry unit status display.
2. “Protocol DME” parameter — representation and assignment of a type of the telemetry unit
connected. This parameter may be set to:

94
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

• “No” — telemetry unit is not connected;


• “TMS-1” — “Electon-TMS-1” terrestrial telemetry unit is connected;
• “TMS-2” — Electon-TMS-2” terrestrial telemetry unit is connected;
• “Almaz” — terrestrial telemetry unit produced by “Almaz” is connected;
• “Etalon” — terrestrial telemetry unit produced by “Etalon” is connected;
• “Orion “ — terrestrial telemetry unit produced by “Orion” is connected;
• “Izhevsk” — telemetry interface unit produced by Ltd “Izhevsk radio manufacturing plant” is
connected;
• “Borets” — submersible telemetering system unit produced by Lim “Borets” is connected;
• “Triol” — “Triol TMST” terrestrial telemetry unit produced by Triol Corporation is connected;
• “WoodGroup” — Smartguard submersible telemetering system unit produced by “Woodgroup”
is connected;
• “Phoenix” — Phoenix submersible telemetering system unit produced by “REDA” (Shlumberger)
is connected;
• “Phoenix/Uniconn” — Phoenix submersible telemetering system unit;
• “SKAD-2002” — “SKAD-2002” submersible telemetering system unit produced by “BelNIPIneaft”
is connected;
• “Centrilift” — submersible telemetering system unit produced by “Centrilift” Company is connected
(look at the note in the page break);
• “Alnas” — submersible telemetering system unit produced by Ltd “Alnas” is connected;
• “SPT-2” — submersible telemetering system unit “SPT-2” produced by Lim “Borets” is connected;
• “Phoenix PIC v2” — submersible telemetering system unit produced by “REDA” (Shlumberger);
• “Novomet” — submersible telemetering system unit produced by Ltd “Novomet”;
• “TMST-3” — terrestrial telemetering system unit TMST-3 produced by CJSC “Electon” is connected.
• “Oxford” — terrestrial telemetry unit produced by “Oxford” is connected;
• “Solvapli” — terrestrial telemetry unit produced by “Solvapli” is connected;
• “ACE Downhole” — submersible telemetering system unit “ACE Downhole”;
• “ViewPoint” — terrestrial telemetry unit produced by “Oxford” is connected;
• “Zhenit” — terrestrial telemetry unit produced by “Oxford” is connected;
2. “DME exchange rate” parameter defines the rate of data exchange between VSDC and TMS unit.
3. “DME address” parameter — representation and assignment of address for terrestrial telemetering
unit connected.
By default producers of telemetering systems set the following addresses for units:
• “TMS-1” — 1 set value may be changed by manufacturer; address in UMKA-03 controller shall
correspond to that set by manufacturer);
• “TMS-2” — 1(set value may be changed by manufacturer; address in UMKA-03 controller shall
correspond to that set by manufacturer);
• “Izhevsk” — 17 (value is set by manufacturer and cannot be changed);
• “Borets” — 51 (value is set by manufacturer and cannot be changed);
• “Triol” — 53 (set value may be changed by manufacturer; address in UMKA-03 controller shall
correspond to that set by manufacturer);

95
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
• “Phoenix” — 1 (set value may be changed by manufacturer; address in UMKA-03 controller shall
correspond to that set by manufacturer);
• “Novomet” — 37 (value is set by manufacturer and it cannot be changed);
• “SKAD-2002” — 1 (set value may be changed by manufacturer; address in UMKA-03 controller
shall correspond to that set by manufacturer);
• “WoodGroup”, “Centrilift”, “Alnas”, “TMSN-3” — are defined automatically.
4. 
“DME” parameter indicates status of the data exchange between UMKA-03 controller and
telemetry unit through the digital data-exchange channel. “Identified” option indicates that
the communication is established and that information may be acquired from the telemetry
transducers. Otherwise this parameter will be set to “Not identified”. Remember that the telemetry
unit identification process may take up to 2 minutes.
5. “Auto-Setup” parameter — all the parameters may be measured by a selected telemetering system
through the digital channel.
6. “Current R ins.” parameter — indication of actual value of the “Cable — ESM” system insulation
resistance.
Note! Make sure that telemetry system unit is adjusted on “Ambient pressure” (Intake Pressure, bar)
measuring transfer when VSD operates with “Centrilift” telemetry system.
It requires adjusting of measuring units parameter – international measuring units SI wherein pressure
is measured in “bar”.
7. “Intake pressure” parameter — indication of the pump suction (intake) pressure.
8. “Compensator pressure” parameter — indication of current pressure in compensator.
9. “Amb. Temperature” parameter — indication of the actual ambient temperature.
10. “ESM oil temperature” parameter — indication of ESM’s oil actual temperature.
11. “XY vibration” parameter — indication of actual vibration in X- and Y-directions.
12. “Z vibration” parameter — indication of actual vibration in Z-direction.
13. “Pump discharge press.” parameter — indication of actual value of the pump discharge pressure.
14. “Pump Discharge Temperature” parameter — indication of actual temperature at the pump discharge.
16. “Delivery rate” parameter — indication of actual value of the pump delivery rate.
17. “Radial motor vibration” parameter — indication the vibration velocity values in XY plane taken from
digital connection channel from DME “Novomet”. If other types of DME are connected, value is equal
to “0”.
18. “Axial motor vibration” parameter — indication the vibration velocity values in Z plane taken from digital
connection channel from DME Novomet. If other types of DME are connected, value is equal to “0”.
19. “ESM winding temperature “ parameter — indication the ESM winding temperature.
20. “Current Leakage TM“ parameter — indication the current leakage of DME.

96
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

“Intake pressure” second-level menu (Pump suction pressure)

1. 
“IP Source” parameter assigns a source for obtaining data on the pump suction pressure
(intake pressure). This parameter may be set to:
• “DME” — a pump suction-pressure signal comes through the digital communication channel;
• “Not available” — no input is selected;
• “Аin1.1” – “Аin1.8” — a signal from the telemetry unit containing information on the pump
suction pressure goes to one of the first-group analog inputs;
• “Аin2.1” – “Аin2.4” — a signal from the telemetry unit containing information on the pump
suction pressure goes to one of the second-group analog inputs.
2. “Intake Pressure” parameter — indication of actual pressure at the pump suction side.
3. 
“OFF lower limit” parameter — lower limit of tripping by “Suction Pressure” protection.
ESM will be tripped if actual value of the parameter is lower than the preset one.
4. “ON upper limit” parameter — upper limit of ARC triggering after “Suction Pressure” protection
has operated. In case the protection has operated, ARC would not take place until pressure is
lower than this preset value. Manual start may be enabled only if the pressure value exceeds
the tripping lower limit.
5. “Starting time” parameter — protection operation delay at ESM starting.
6. “OFF time” parameter — delay time for ESM tripping caused by this protection when actual value
of the parameter goes beyond the upper or lower limit.
7. “Protection” parameter may be set to:
• “Automatic restart” — parameter checkout is enabled. ARC is possible;
• “Off” — parameter checkout is disabled. Emergency values are ignored;
• “Lockout” — parameter checkout is enabled. ARC is not possible.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“P suction”) shall appear on the controller display.
8. “Protect on MIN in STOP” parameter — defines the protection tripping in STOP.
9. “Number of restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM is tripped by this protection.
10. “Restart delay” parameter — ARC delay time after the parameter has been restored.
11. “Input type” parameter — defines type of a signal which a particular analog input is designed for.
Type of a signal may be changed only when the motor is shut down. Analog inputs of the controller
may be set to the following types of signals: 0—10 V; 0—5 mA; 4—20 mA.
12. “Display format” parameter — format for displaying pump suction (intake) pressure.
13. “Scale minimum” parameter — value of measured parameter corresponding to zero signal at
the analog input. This parameter is used for calibrating analog input, and it may take any value
when digital input is used.
14. “Scale maximum” parameter — value of measured parameter corresponding to peak signal at
the analog input. This parameter is used for calibrating analog input, and it may take any value
when digital input is used.
15. “Normaliz.of the pressure” — parameter enables startup depending on the pump suction pressure
when ARC is enabled.

97
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
“Compensator pressure” second level menu

This menu contains parameters for setting and indication the values of pressure in compensator.
1. 
“CP Source” parameter assigns the source of receiving the information about pressure in
compensator. This parameter can take the following values:
• “DME” — is the sign about pressure in compensator is received through the digital connection
channel from telemetring system;
• “Not available” — means that an input is not chosen;
• “Аin1.1” – “Аin1.8” — is the sign of telemetry unit with information about the pressure in
compensator is connected to one of the first group analogue inputs;
• “Аin2.1” –”Аin2.4” — is the sign of telemetry unit with information about pressure in
compensator is connected to one of the second group analogue inputs.
2. “Compensator pressure” parameter contains the indication of the actual pressure in compensator.
3. “OFF lower limit” parameter is the lower limit of switching-off by the protection “Compensator
pressure”. ESM will be switched off if the actual value of the parameter will be lower than the value
of this parameter.
4. “OFF upper limit” parameter is the upper limit of switching-off by the protection “Compensator
pressure”. ESM will be switched off if the actual value of the parameter will be higher than the
value of this parameter.
5. “Starting time” parameter — is the delay of protection activation at startup of ESM.
6. “OFF time” parameter — time delay of switching-off the ESM by the protection when the actual
value of given parameter is out of the upper or lower switching-off limits.
7. “Protection” parameter takes the following values:
• “Automatic restart” — parameter control is switched-on with ability of automatic restart;
• “Off” — parameter control is switched-off, emergency values are neglected;
• “Lockout” — parameter control is switched-on without the ability of automatic restart.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“P ESM Max”, “P ESM Min”) shall appear on
the controller display.
8. “Protect on MAX in STOP” parameter — protection off in STOP for the maximum value of pressure
compensator. It may take “Yes” or “No”.
9. “Protection on MIN in STOP” parameter — protection off in STOP for the minimum value of
pressure compensator. It may take “Yes” or “No”.
10. “Number of restarts” parameter is the number of restarts after ESM switching-off by the protection.
11. “Restart delay” parameter means the time delay of automatic restart after parameter recovery of
its emergency value.
12. “Input type” parameter defines a type of a signal for analogue input. The signal type can be changed
if the motor is stopped only. Controller analogue inputs can be set for such signal types: 0–10 V;
0–5 mА; 4–20 mА.
13. “Display format” parameter is the format of displaying the pressure in compensator.

98
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

14. “Scale minimum” parameter is the value of measured parameter which corresponds to zero signal
of the analogue input. This parameter is used for analogue input calibration and can have any
value while operation with digital input.
15. “Scale maximum” parameter is the value of measured parameter which corresponds the maximum
signal of analogue input. This parameter is used for calibration of analog input and can have any
value while operation with digital input.

“Amb. temperature” second-level menu

This menu contains parameters for setting and indicating the ambient temperature values. Settings are
similar to those specified in “Compensator pressure” item.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“T°amb Max”, “T°amb Min”) shall appear on
the controller display.

“ESM oil temperature” second-level menu

This menu contains parameters for setting and indicating the ESM’s oil temperature values. Settings are
similar to those specified in “Compensator pressure” item.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“T° ESM Max”, “T° ESM Min”) shall appear on
the controller display.

“Vibration” second-level menu

This menu contains parameters for setting and indicating the vibration values. Settings are similar to
those specified in “Compensator pressure” item.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“VibrXyMax”, “VibrXyMin”, “VibrZMax”,
“VibrZMin”) shall appear on the controller display.

“Annulus pressure” second-level menu

This menu contains parameters for setting and indicating the annulus pressure values. Settings are
similar to those specified in “Intake pressure” item.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“PannMax”, “PannMin”) shall appear on
the controller display.

“Buffer pressure” second-level menu

This menu contains parameters for setting and indicating the buffer pressure values. Settings are similar
to those specified in “Compensator pressure” item.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“PbufMax”, “PbufMin”.) shall appear on
the controller display.

99
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
“Line pressure” second-level menu (Flow line pressure)

This menu contains parameters for setting and indicating the flow-line pressure values. Settings are
similar to those specified in “Intake pressure” item.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“PLinMax”, “PLinMin”) shall appear on
the controller display.

“Annulus fluid level” second-level menu

This menu contains parameters for setting and indicating the annulus fluid level.
1. “Annulus level Source” parameter specifies a source of obtaining information of the annulus fluid level.
This parameter may be set to:
• “DME” — an annulus fluid level signal comes through the digital communication channel;
• “Not available” — no input is selected;
• “Ain.1.1” –”Ain.1.8” — a signal from the telemetry unit containing information on the annulus
fluid level goes to one of the first-group analog inputs;
• “Ain.2.1” – “Ain.2.4” — a signal from the telemetry unit containing information on the annulus
fluid level goes to one of the second-group analog inputs.
2. “Annulus level” parameter — indication of current fluid level in annulus.
3. “ON lower limit” parameter — lower limit of ARC triggering after “Annulus level” protection has
operated. In case the protection has operated, ARC would not take place until the annulus fluid level
is higher than this preset value. Manual start may be enabled only if the fluid level value is lower than
the tripping upper limit.
4. “OFF upper limit” parameter — upper limit of ARC disabling after “Annulus level” protection has
operated.
5. “Starting time” parameter — protection operation delay at ESM starting.
6. “OFF time” parameter — delay time for ESM tripping caused by this protection when actual value
of the parameter goes beyond the upper or lower limit.
7. “Protection” parameter may be set to:
• “Automatic restart” — parameter checkout is enabled. ARC is possible;
• “Off” — parameter checkout is disabled. Emergency values are ignored;
• “Lockout” — parameter checkout is enabled. ARC is not possible.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“h annMax”, “h annMin”) shall appear on
the controller display.
8. “Protection on MAX in STOP” parameter — protection off in STOP for the maximum value of annulus
fluid level. It may take “Yes” or “No”.
9. “Protection on MIN in STOP” parameter — protection off in STOP for the minimum value of annulus
fluid level. It may take “Yes” or “No”.
10. “Number of restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM tripping caused by this protection.
11. “Restart delay “ parameter — ARC delay time after the parameter has been restored.

100
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

12. “Input type” parameter — defines type of a signal which a particular analog input is designed for.
Type of a signal may be changed only when the motor is shut down. Analog inputs of the controller
may be set to the following types of signals: 0–10 V; 0–5 mA; 4–20 mA.
13. “Scale minimum” parameter — value of measured parameter corresponding to zero signal at
the analog input. This parameter is used for calibrating analog input, and it may take any value
when digital input is used.
14. “Scale maximum” parameter — value of measured parameter corresponding to peak signal at
the analog input. This parameter is used for calibrating analog input, and it may take any value
when digital input is used.

“Contact pressure gauge” second-level menu

1. 
“Current value” parameter — actual level of a signal at the discrete input. “Inactive” option
corresponds to the signal low level (no current), “Active” option — to high signal level
(current is available).
2. 
“Active level” parameter — level of a signal availability of which at the input will cause
the ESM tripping.
3. “Starting time” parameter — protection operation delay time after starting.
4. “OFF time” parameter — delay time for ESM tripping by discrete-input signal protection.
5. “Protection” parameter enables the discrete input protection checkout.
This parameter may be set to:
• “Automatic restart” — parameter checkout is enabled. ARC is possible;
• “Off” — parameter checkout is disabled. Emergency values are ignored;
• “Lockout” — parameter checkout is enabled. ARC is not possible.
If this protection operates an appropriate message (“ContGage”) shall appear on the controller display.
6. 
“Number of restarts” parameter — number of ARC after ESM tripping by discrete-input
protection signal.
7. “Restart delay” parameter — defines ARC delay time after the parameter has been restored.

“Additional analog input 1”, “Additional analog input 2” second-level menu

Additional analog inputs are used for receiving any other analog signals. These menus comprise
parameters for setting and displaying values of additional analog inputs. Settings are similar to those
specified in “Compensator pressure” item.

If this protection operates an appropriate message (“DA1Max”, “DA1Min”, “DA2Max”, “DA2Min”) shall
appear on the controller display.

101
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2.3.3.10 “Installation parameters” first-level menu
This menu comprises the following parameters:
1. “Drive type” parameter — type of a Drive.
1. “Filter Sin” parameter — switch on/off sine filter.
2. “Field No.” parameter is intended for setting filed number.
3. “Cluster No.” parameter is intended for setting cluster number.
4. “Well No.” parameter is intended for setting well number.
5. “ESM rated current” parameter — ESM rated current. This parameter is used for protecting
the submersible motor against overloads, for calculating the ESM load factor and for tripping on
underload. It is set according to the motor specification.
6. “Motor rated PF” parameter — value of ESM rated power factor.
7. “Step-up tr. power” parameter — power of step-up (ACVOT) transformer.
8. “ESM rated power” parameter — ESM rated power.
9. “ESP rated efficiency” parameter — reference parameter to be set as per value specified in
documentation supplied together with ESPU.
10. “ESP head” parameter — reference parameter to be set as per value specified in documentation
supplied together with ESPU.
11. “Setting depth” parameter — ESM setting depth.
12. “ESM rated voltage” parameter — ESM rated voltage.
13. “Motor rated freq.” parameter — motor rated frequency.
14. “Idle motor rated cur” parameter —motor rated current under no-load conditions (at idle running).
15. “Work voltage” parameter — type voltage 380 (480) V.
16. “Brake chopper voltage on” parameter — switching on voltage of braking chopper.
17. “Brake chopper voltage off” parameter — switching off voltage of braking chopper.
18. “Power system” parameter — parameter sets the frequency of the mains supply 50 Hz (60 Hz).
19. “Set Bypass” parameter — switch on/off Bypass.
20. “Filter Capacity Manual” parameter — installation capacity filter.
21. “Reserve DCC” parameter — parameter specifies the supply voltage Ud is relatively U/F.
22. “R-phase current” parameter — shows the current phase R.
23. “S-phase current” parameter — shows the current phase S.
24. “T-phase current” parameter — shows the current phase T.

2.3.3.11 “Calc.of step-up transf.tap voltage” first-level menu


This menu comprises the following parameters:
1. “ESM rated voltage” parameter — ESM rated voltage.
2. “ESM rated current” parameter — ESM rated current. This parameter is used for protecting
the submersible motor against overloads, for calculating the ESM load factor and for tripping on
underload. It is set according to the motor specification.

102
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

3. 
“Reference freq.” parameter — reference frequency. It is used for calculating the step-up
transformer’s (ACVOT) tap voltage automatically.
4. “Reference voltage” parameter — voltage on the step-up transformer’s (ACVOT) primary winding at
reference frequency. It is used for calculating the step-up transformer’s tap voltage automatically.
5. “Cable cross section” parameter — value of the cable cross-section.
6. “Setting depth” parameter — ESM setting depth.
7. 
“Reservoir temp.” parameter — value of reservoir temperature. It is used for calculating
the step-up transformer’s (ACVOT) tap voltage automatically.
8. “Recommended U step-up trans” parameter — recommended tap voltage.
9. “Prim winding voltage” parameter — parameter is intended for setting tap voltage of the step-up
transformer primary winding.
10. “K. Transform” parameter — parameter is intended to enter the transformation ratio step-down
transformer.
11. “Step-up tr. tap U” parameter is intended for setting tap voltage of the step-up transformer
secondary winding. It is used by controller for calculating the motor current.
To calculate the step-up transformer’s tap voltage an operator shall type in values of parameters 1...7.
Calculation will be performed automatically. The calculation result will be displayed as “Recommended
U step-up trans”. Recommended value shall be typed in by editing the “093 Step-up tr. tap U” parameter.
Tap voltage calculation procedure:
Tap voltage of the step-up transformer is calculated by the following formula:

Utap = (U ESM
• F ref
)
+ ∆U • Kloss (2.12)

where, Кloss — loss factor in VSD;


Utap — tapping voltage in step-up transformer’s secondary winding, V;
UESM – ESM rated voltage (according to the specification), V;
∆U — voltage loss in cable line, V;
Fref — Variable Speed Drive reference frequency, Hz.

Loss factor in the station is calculated by the formula that follows:


380
Kloss = (2.13)
Uact
where, Uact — actual voltage on the step-up transformer’s primary winding at reference frequency, V.
It shall be set manually;
380 — normal supply voltage, V. Table of voltage losses per 1000 m of cable line is hardwired in
the program and is given in Annex E.

When defining voltage losses (∆U) an appropriate value from the table is corrected by the following
formula depending of the total length of a cable:

103
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
table value • L tot.cab (2.15)
∆U =
1000
where, ∆U — voltage loss in cable line, V;
Ltot.cab. — total length of a cable, m.

2.3.3.12 “System” first-level menu

This menu is intended for setting system parameters ensuring the Variable Speed Drive operation.
This menu comprises the following second-level menus:
• “Passwords”;
• “Operation with USB”;
• “Status set-up”;
• “ACS set-up”;
• “Ethernet settings”;
• GPRS settings;
• “Display set-up”;
• “Setting universal time”;
• “Statistics”;
• “Energy meter”;
• “Current timers”;
• “VSD parameters”;
• “VSDC parameters”.

“Passwords” second-level menu

Passwords are intended for limiting access to parameters editing.


When password protection is enabled an access to parameters editing is limited. If a parameter shall be
changed, enter an appropriate password and the parameter will be available for editing. A password is
requested at any editing if the time since the last keystroke on the controller keyboard exceeds 5 min.
A password is displayed within the whole time period when editing is accessible without entering the
same. Upon the expiry of a 5 min time interval a message “*****” will be displayed. For the password to
be hidden right away and the editing password protection to be set up the “View only” parameter shall
be set to “Yes”.
There have been provided seven passwords for users, one – for process men and one – for manufacturer.
Password is a number from 1 to 9999.
Password-assigning procedure:
• Select an access level authorized;
• Enter a number from 1 to 9999 which will be a password for the access level selected.

Remember this number!

104
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

To change the password the following procedure shall be adhered:


• Select an access level required;
• Enter current password for this access level;
• Type in new password.
If a wrong password is entered a message “PASSWORD INVALID” appears.
Password setting procedure:
1. To limit access to parameters editing the “Password protection” parameter shall be set to “On”.
2. To get access to changing parameters it is essential to select an access level required. Enter
current password for the specified access level. If this password is correct the entered numbers
will remain on display and parameters may be changed.
If a password is incorrect it will be reset to zero in 1 – 2 seconds. Afterwards correct numbers shall be entered.
Access to changing settings is possible within 5 minutes since the last keystroke on the controller front
panel. Upon that the access terminates and a password shall be entered again.
To change the password the following procedure shall be adhered:
1. Enter actual password.
2. Enter new password. Remember it.
Actual password may be reviewed and changed through the ACS or service software when connecting PC to
the “USB port” connector located on the UMKA-03 controller’s front panel.
If “Password protection” parameter is set to “On” during the station operation an appropriate message
(“ARS locked”) will appear on the controller display upon the expiry of the number of ARC permitted.
Subsequently the Variable Speed Drive may be started only after entering current password.
To preserve confidentiality of a password only the fact of the password entry or change is saved in
the event log — numbers are not specified.
Password protection may be disabled only by operator with “Processman” or “Manufacturer” level of access.
To disable the password protection the following procedure shall be adhered:
• Edit “Password protection” parameter;
• Select an access level in the password request window and enter a password;
• “Password protection” parameter will be accessible for editing in which case current passwords for
“User 1” — “User 7” and “Processman” access levels will be displayed;
• Select “Off” option.

The menu consists of the following parameters:


1. “User password 1” – “User password 7” parameters assign passwords for users.
2. “Processman password” parameter assigns a processman password.
3. “Manufacturer password” parameter assigns a manufacturer password.
4. “View only” parameter includes a request for password entry with no need to wait for 5 min.
5. “Password protection” parameter enables the editing password protection.

“Operation with USB” second-level menu

This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:


1. “USB flash” parameter — identification of USB flash Drive connected.

105
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2. “Read log” parameter — command to start rewriting the event log from controller to USB flash
drive.
3. “Upgrade settings” parameter — command to start upgrading settings from USB flash drive.
4. “Save settings to flash” parameter — command to start saving settings to USB flash drive.
5. “Download help” parameter — command to start downloading help from USB flash drive.
6. “Download screen-saver” parameter — command to start downloading screen-saver from USB
flash drive.
7. “Change firmware” parameter — command to start changing firmware from USB flash drive.
8. “Change IND firmware” parameter — command to start changing firmware IND from USB flash drive.
9. “Help file” parameter — indication of available help files.
10. “Screen-saver file” parameter — indication of available screen-saver files.
11. 
“Save start-up graphs to USB” parameter — command to start saving start-up graphs
to USB flash drive.

“Status set-up” second-level menu

This second-level menu contains parameters for setting the status menu. This menu item includes “Row
№” parameters; and it also provides a possibility to customize a list of parameters to be appeared on
the controller display in the mode of current state representation. There are 14 lines on the display right
side to represent parameters in this mode of operation. If required additional parameters may be added
to the list of parameters using the “Do you want to add parameter?” dialog.
“Row №” parameter defines the controller parameter to be displayed in the appropriate line of status
menu. “No” option also may be set.
In such a case there will be no parameter displayed in this line (blank line).
Variable Speed Drive is supplied with factory-customized settings of “Status set-up” menu. If factory
settings are to be restored, “Load Default it Status window” parameter shall be set to “Yes”.

“ACS set-up” second-level menu

This second-level menu contains the following parameters:


1. 
“Protocol” parameter makes it possible to select “Triol”, “Region 2000”, “Telescope”, “Salym”,
“GasPromHantos”, “CIS” or “ASU TNK” communication protocol to be used with VSD.
The following options of this parameter may be selected:
• “Triol” — setting of communication channel for “Triol” protocol;
• “Region” — communication channel for “Region 2000” protocol is set automatically;
• “Telescope” — communication channel for “Telescope” protocol is set automatically;
• “Salym Pet” — communication channel for “Salym” protocol is set automatically;
• “GasPromHantos” — communication channel for “GasPromHantos” protocol is set automatically;
• “CIS” — communication channel for “CIS” protocol is set automatically;
• “ASU TNK” — communication channel for “ASU TNK” protocol is set automatically.
2. “Baud rate” parameter defines rate of data exchange with VSD controller (computer).

106
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

3. “Node address” parameter defines the VSD network address in VSD.


4. “StopBit” parameter — exchange stop bit of the upper-level VSD.
5. “Simulation mode” parameter defines if the VSD start-stop simulation mode is enabled
(for “Salym Petroleum”).
6. “Manual start-stop” parameter enables start-stop of the Variable Speed Drive in manual mode of
operation (only for “Region” VSD).

This parameter is highly recommended to be agreed upon with VSD operators!

7. “Modem used” parameter defines if GSM-modem is used for data communication. This parameter
may be set to “Used” or “Not used”.
8. “Modem identified” parameter — indicates information of the modem identification.
9. “Ajuster №” parameter contains serial telephone number of the adjuster.
10. “Country and operator code” parameter contains the codes of a country and an operator.
11. “Telephone number” parameter contains directly the telephone number.

“Ethernet setting” second-level menu

This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:


1. “IPType” — parameter establishes how an IP-address may be obtained.

Attention! If the VSD operates with external ACS by digital data channel (for 33.35
firmware version only): “IPType” parameter must be set to “Off” value (disabled)

2. “IPAdressStatic” parameter — static IP-address to be assigned manually.


3. “IPAdressMask” parameter — mask of IP-network.
4. “IPAdressGateway” parameter — IP-address of the network gateway.
5. “IPAdressCurrent” parameter — current IP-address.
6. “NTPServerIPAddress” parameter — IP-address of the time synchronization server – NTP.
7. “NTPTimeDeltaSync” parameter — periodicity of synchronization with NTP server.
8. “NTPTimeSyncLast” parameter — time of the most recent successful synchronization with NTP server.
9. “Time UTC” parameter — current calendar time for Greenwich Mean Time (or UTC).
10. “Time” parameter — current calendar time.
11. “Time zone” parameter — offset of local time from Greenwich Mean Time.
12. “Winter/Summer time” — automatic transition from summer time to winter time and vice versa.
13. “Delay fist command” parameter — pause before the Ethernet module’s first command after
catching the ACS line.
14. “Timeout last command” parameter — maximum Ethernet module’s inaction time before

107
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
releasing the ACS line.

“GPRS setting” second-level menu

This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:


1. “Use GPRS” — parameter sets the GPRS operation.
2. “APN” parameter — parameter sets the name of an access point for GPRS data connection.
3. “GPRS Port” parameter — parameter sets the port of GPRS.
4. “Status GPRS” parameter — information parameter is show operating of GPRS.

“Display set-up” second-level menu

This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:


1. “Nos. display” parameter — makes it possible to display numbers of parameters with their names.
2. 
“Text scrolling” parameter makes it possible to scroll text values in a circle at editing text
parameters.
3. “Menu scrolling” parameter defines a possibility of the menu movement around a circle at editing.
4. “Accelerated editing” parameter makes it possible to increase the rate of change of the numeric
parameter values.
5. “Contrast” parameter — setting of the controller display contrast. Display contrast enhances as
this value increases.
6. “LCD temp. comp.” parameter makes it possible to set display contrast automatically depending
on ambient temperature. It may be set to “On”/”Off”.
7. “Case temp.2” parameter — value of air temperature in the UMKA-03 case.

“Setting universal time” second-level menu

1. “Time” parameter — setting of current date and astronomical time.


2. “Winter/Summer time” switching-on an automatic transition from summer time to winter time and
vice versa.
This parameter may be set to:
• “Off” — disables automatic revert to standard time from summer time to winter time and vice
versa;
• “On” — enables automatic revert to standard time from summer time to winter time and vice
versa.
3. “Time” parameter — reference parameter representing particular time (“Winter” or “Summer”).

“Statistics” second-level menu

This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:


1. “ESM oper. time” parameter — indication of ESM operating time.
2. “ESM downtime” parameter — indication of VSD down time after a regular start.
3. “Number of starts” parameter — indicates number of VSD starts.
4. “Overload stop num” parameter — indicates number of stops caused by ESM overload.

108
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

5. “Underload stop num” parameter — indicates number of stops caused by ESM underload.
6. “Other prot. stop num” parameter — indicates number of stops caused by operation of other protections.
7. “Counters” parameter is used for zeroing values of counters.
8. “Total operating time” parameter — indicates total operating time of the Variable Speed Drive.

“Energy meter”(This option is unavailable in actual specification of VSD)

This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:


1. “Energy meter” parameter — defines if the electricity supply meter used for. This parameter may
be set to “Used”, “Not Used”.
If the parameter is set to “Not Used” the following parameters are displayed:
2. “Act. energy from reset” parameter is a value of forward-direction active energy.
3. “React. energy from reset” parameter is a value of forward-direction reactive energy.
4. “PrecedDay Act Energy” parameter is a value of forward-direction active energy over the preceding day.
5. 
“PrecedDay React Energy” parameter is a value of forward-direction reactive energy over
the preceding day.
6. “Act. energy for the day” parameter is a value of forward-direction active energy over the current day.
7. 
React. energy for the day” parameter is a value of forward-direction reactive energy over
the current day.
8. “Energy meter” parameter is used for resetting the energy meter.

“Current timers” second-level menu

This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:


1. “Last start cause” parameter represents a source of the START command.
It may be set to “No error, Drive Connect, WrDrv, VersPO, DMEConn, EmergStop, Rinsulation, Door,
ContGage, PsucMax (Min), P ESM Max (Min), T°ambMax (Min), T° ESM Max (Min), VibrXyMax (Min),
VibrZMax (Min), PannMax (Min), PbufMax (Min), PLinMax (Min), h annMax (Min), DA1…DA2Max (Min),
HighVolt (LowVolt), Uunbal, Underload, Overload, MinFreq, CurrUnb, COTF, Turbine, PowSw U (V, W),
Т°Sw. U (V, W), Т°discr, Ud max, Ud min, Overcurrent, NoAccel, BadSupp, PhFail, Phasing CBA, NotReady,
Operator, ACS, Timer, SupplOn”.
2. “Last stop cause” parameter indicates a source of the STOP command. It has the same options as
the “Last start cause” parameter.
3. “Start time” parameter indicates time when the last START command has been issued.
4. “Stop time” parameter indicates time when the last STOP command has been issued.
5. “The reason of the next start/stop” parameter indicates a reason of the latest start.
6. “Time to ARC” parameter indicates time to ARC.
7. “Power-up time” parameter — time of the last power-up.
8. “Power-off time” parameter — time of the last power-off.
9. “Time from start” parameter — countdown from the last start.
10. “Time from stop” parameter — countdown from the last stop or from power-up.

109
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
11. “ARC locked” parameter shows it the ARC locking is enabled.
12. “Planned ARC” parameter defines if ARC will take place.
13. “Too many ARC” parameter defines a reason due to which another ARC will not take place.
14. “Start cause” parameters — reference parameters characterizing the Variable Speed Drive current
state.
15. “Stop cause” parameters — reference parameters characterizing the VSD current state.

“VSD parameters” second-level menu

All the parameters of the second-level menu “VSDC parameters” shall be set by
specialists of Triol Corporation! Unauthorized change of these parameters may cause
the equipment malfunction!

1. “VSD type” parameter — coding of the VSD type.


2. “VSD serial No.” parameter — VSD serial number.
3. “VSD manufacture date” parameter — date of the VSD manufacture — day, month, year.

“VSDC parameters” second-level menu

All the parameters of the second-level menu “VSDC parameters” shall be set by
specialists of Triol Corporation! Unauthorized change of these parameters may cause
the equipment malfunction!

1. “VSDC serial No.” parameter — serial number of the Variable Speed Drive controller.
2. “VSDC manufacture date” parameter — date of manufacture of the VSD controller — day, month,
year, time of installation.
3. “VSDC software install date” parameter — date of installation of the VSD controller software —
day, month, year.
4. “VSDC software version” parameter — indicates the VSD controller software version.
5. “Subversion Number” parameter — indicates the VSD controller software subversion.
6. “Drive software version” parameter — version No. of software for the VSD controller which controls
the frequency converter.
7. “Drive type” parameter — type of a drive.
8. “Load factory type” parameter — parameter makes it possible to reset current time settings to the
default (factory) ones.
9. “Language (язык)” is intend to chose the actual language of the controller (Russian/English).
10. “Length format” parameter — parameter specifies the length unit.
11. “Area format” parameter — parameter specifies the area unit.
12. “Volume format” parameter — parameter specifies the volume unit.
13. “Consumption format” parameter — parameter specifies the cosumption unit.

110
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Working with USB flash drives


All operations with USB flash drive shall be conducted as follows:
1. Connect USB flash drive to the jack on the controller front panel.

If USB flash drive is connected to a running controller the event log will be written to
this drive automatically.

2. Enter the “System / Operation with USB/” menu.


3. Depending on the action to be done one of the parameters described in Table 2.7, shall be edited
by setting it to “Yes”.

Table 2.7 — List of parameters

Operation
Parameter name Brief description operations
execution time, s
«Read log» 2 – 15 Rewrites event log controller to USB flash drive
«Upgrade settings» 3 Rewrites settings from USB flash controller***
«Save settings to Extracts all settings from controller to USB flash
3
flash» drive
Changes the controller firmware to that saved in
«Change firmware» 30 – 45
USB flash drive****
Rewrites help file from USB flash drive to con-
«Download help» 3
troller
«Download screen- Rewrites screen-saver file from USB flash drive
3
saver» to controller
Upgrades the utility responsible for the software
«Upgrade loader» 3
downloading from USB flash drive to controller

The message will disappear in 30 – 45 sec, and the controller will start running new program.
4. If to carry out the action selected the controller shall define more exactly what particular file is required
for operator a file selection menu will be displayed. Select an appropriate file using “Down” or “Up” keys
and press “Enter” key. If more precise definition is not required (a single file of interest on USB flash
Drive) the file selection menu is not displayed.
5. Time to the action termination is shown on the controller display.
*** — setup file is created using service software, and it may contain either all the controller’s set values or
some of them. When updating set values through the USB flash drive only those available in the file may
be changed.

111
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
**** — firmware replacement procedure differs from the similar ones in that a special message will be
generated within 2–3 seconds warning that the VSD power supply may be interrupted in the process of the
controller reflashing.
Before replacing the controller’s firmware by one with a new version it’s necessary to read the log, and after
replacing the firmware the controller’s log shall be cleared to ensure proper functioning of the service software.
If the controller’s firmware has been replaced by one with a new subversion, there is no need for clearing
the log after reflashing.
6. Upon completion of the action a pop-up help appears. It characterizes the action result. Edited
parameter is set to “No” again. Now working with the controller in a normal mode may be continued.

It is strictly prohibited to remove USB flash drive from the jack until the action is over!
This may cause a failure not only of the USB flash drive but of the VSD controller as
well.

Parameters, given in Table 2.8, characterize availability of some files in the controller memory.

Table 2.8 — Availability of files memory controller

Parameter
Options Parameter description
name
«Not identified», «Tran- Indicates type of the USB flash drive con-
«USB flash»
scend», «Kingston»….. nected
Indicates available of the help in the control-
«Help file» «Not available», «Available»
ler memory
«Screen-saver Indicates available of the screen-saver in
«Not available», «Available»
file» the controller memory
File allocation
Information on the file types supported by the controller is given in table 2.9. All files the UMKA-03
controller is dealing with are located in the “:/UMKA-3” folder in the disk root. File name is made up of
fixed beginning (“UM_”), file No. in a directory and the file extension. Thus, up to 1000 files of the same
type may be stored on a single USB flash drive.

Table 2.9 — File types supported controllers

Parameter name File name Text title File size

UM3_0001. «field_0001_well_0001_30-06-
Event log 130 KB — 4,3 MB
JRN 2015_09-55-02.jrn»
Controller’s firm- UM3_0001. «Exe_File_for_Umka_3_Ver-
200 KB — 2 MB
ware LDR sion_0001.LDR»

112
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Set value file cre-


UM3_0001. «Settings_File_for_Umka_3_
ated by service <5 KB
STT Version_0001.STT»
software
Set value file writ-
UM3_0001. « field_0001_well_0001_30-
ten from controller <5 KB
STT 06-2015_09-55-02.stt»
memory
UM3_0001. «Help_File_for_Umka_3_Ver-
Help file <500 KB
HLU sion_0001.HLU»
«ScreenPict_File_for_
UM3_0001.
Screen-saver file Umka_3_Version_0001. 10 KB
SCR
SCR»
«Bootloader_File_for_
UM3_0001.
Loader file Umka_3_Version_0001. <30 KB
BOT
BOT»

Each file has a header with additional information about its content. To make the header text visible it’s
necessary to open this file using any text editor. First line — file header.
When saving files from USB flash drive to PC the service software renames the files giving them names
taken from the file header.

2.3.3.13 “Event log” first-level menu


If “Log viewing mode” option is selected the controller does into the event log viewing mode.

“Stops-starts log viewing mode” second-level menu

This second-level menu includes parameters displaying power-up/power-off time and date as well as
ESM start’s and stop’s time and date.

“Editing log viewing mode” second-level menu

This second-level menu includes parameters displaying date and time of the parameter editing as well
as the parameter to be edited.

“Viewing mode set-up” second-level menu

This second-level menu comprises the following parameters:


1. “Viewing Starts/Stops” parameter defines if records of the ESM starts and stops will be displayed
in the log viewing mode.

113
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
2. “Viewing emergency trip” parameter defines if records of the ESM trips caused by Variable Speed
Drive protections will be displayed in the log viewing mode.
If a trip takes place the trip record will contain parameter values characterizing and describing just
this particular trip.
3. “Viewing param. changes” parameter defines if records of changes (programming) of the Variable
Speed Drive parameters will be displayed in the log viewing mode.
4. “Viewing currents” parameter defines if values of the VSD output current contained in the records
will be displayed in the log viewing mode.
5. “Viewing voltages” parameter defines if values of the VSD output voltage contained in the records
will be displayed in the log viewing mode.
6. “Viewing currents and voltages” parameter defines if values of the VSD output current and output
voltage contained in the records will be displayed in the log viewing mode.
7. “Viewing DME data” parameter defines if records of the parameter values specified in
the “Downhole measure equipment” (TMS) item of this menu will be displayed in the log viewing mode.
8. “Viewing well-head and transducers” parameter defines if values of the well-head transducers
contained in the records will be displayed in the log viewing mode.
9. “Viewing events” parameter defines if event records will be displayed in the log viewing mode.
10...16. “Viewing arbitrary Param. 1”...”Viewing arbitrary Param. 4” parameters define if values
contained in the records will be displayed in the log viewing mode.
17. “Electric energy display” parameter — displaying trend lines and network characteristics when
reviewing the event log.
18. “Search by time” parameter — for setting parameters ensuring selection of the date when events to
be viewed happened. Search of events by time enables fast and convenient finding of a required
record in the event log. It needs to specify a required month and day. When entering “Log viewing
mode” item of this menu the event happened at the same time or earlier defined by “Search by
time” parameter will be displayed.
This parameter may be set to:
• “Disable” — disabling search by date. The latest event will be highlighted in the log viewing
mode.
• “Permit” — enabling search by date. The event happened at the same time or earlier defined
by “Search by time” parameter will be highlighted in the log viewing mode.
19. “Search” parameter defines a date when the event displaying has begun.
20. “Log” parameter makes it possible to delete all records in the event log.

Access to clearing procedure is password protected!

List of parameters in trends of currents, voltages, telemetry and well-head transducers is given in Table 2.10.

114
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Table 2.10 — List of parameters in the trends of currents, voltages, telemetry and estuarine (annulus)
sensors

Trend List of parameters displayed


“Total ESM cur- “Output Voltage”, “ESM active current”,
rent”, “ESM active current”, “Current unbalance”, “Current R ins”,
Trend of “Output frequency”, “Load factor”, “Effi- one of “U (V, W) phase IGBT temp.” pa-
currents ciency factor”, “ESM current, U phase”, rameters having maximum value of the
“ESM current, V phase”, “Overcurrent protection”
“ESM current, W phase”, “ESM voltage”
“AB in. voltage”, “BC in. voltage”, “In. voltage unbal.”, “Ud voltage”,
Trend of
“CA in. voltage”, “Output Voltage” “Current R ins”, “Freq. backspin”
voltages
(turbine rotation frequency)
“Total ESM cur- “Output Voltage”, “ESM active current”,
rent”, “ESM active current”, “Current unbalance”, “Current R ins”,
Trend of “Output frequency”, “Load factor”, one of “U (V, W) phase IGBT temp.”
currents “Efficiencyfactor”,“ESMcurrent,Uphase”, parameters having maximum value of
and volt- “ESM current, V phase”, the “Overcurrent protection”, “Ud volt-
ages “ESM current, W phase”, “ESM voltage”, age”, “Current Rins”, “Freq. backspin”
“AB in. voltage”, “BC in. voltage”, (turbine rotation frequency)
“CA in. voltage”, “In. voltage unbal.”
Telem- “Intake pressure”, “ESM oil temperature”, “XY vibration”,
etry (DME) “Compensator pressure”, “Z vibration”
trend “Ambient temperature”
Well-head “Annulus pressure”, “Buffer pressure”, “Annulus level”, “Add. Ain1.”, “Add. Ain2.”
trend “(Flow) Line pressure”

“Set. regist. by time” second-level menu

1. “Rec. time oper” parameter defines recording time for parameters of voltage, current and
telemetering system in operation.
2. “Urgent rec.” parameter defines recording time for all the parameters when set value of any of
them is exceeded.
3. “Rec. time stop” parameter defines recording time for input voltage parameters when the motor
is shut down.
4. “DME rec. period” parameter defines recording time for parameters of the telemetering system in
operation and for those of external transducers.
5. “Rec. time start” parameter defines recording time for all the parameters after the motor has start
running. Parameters are registered at one-second intervals.

115
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
6. “Supply failure rec time” parameter is a period of recording actual voltage values into the log in
event of the network fault that impedes starting (LowVolt, HighVolt, Uunbal, PhFail).
7. “TM Triol measurement registr. time” — parameter is a period of recording readings of Triol
telemetry into the log.
8. “Electric energy registr.(once/day)” parameter is a period of recording (watt-hour) meter readings
into the log (once per day).

“Set. regist. by changes” second-level menu

1. “ ΔI ESM registered” parameter defines a minimum change of the VSD output current which
implies registration in the event log. The following parameters are registered in the event log:
“505 Total ESM current”, “698 VSD total current”, “699 VSD active current”, “003 Output frequency”,
“017 Load factor”, “016 Efficiency factor”, “004 ESM current, phase U”, “005 ESM current, phase W”,
“006 ESM current, phase V”, “007 Current unbalance”.
2. “ ΔU registered” parameter defines a minimum change of line voltage which implies registration
in the event log. The following parameters are registered in the event log: “018 RS input voltage”
(AB), “019 ST input voltage” (BC), “020 TR input voltage” (CA), “In. voltage unbal.”, “Ud voltage”.
3. “ Δ Intake pressure registered” parameter defines a minimum change of intake pressure that implies
registration in the event log.
4. “ Δ Compens.press.recorded” parameter defines a minimum change of compensator pressure that
implies registration in the event log.
5. “ Δ Temp. amb. Registered” parameter defines a minimum change of ambient temperature in
a well that implies registration in the event log.
6. “ Δ Temp. ESM Registered” parameter defines a minimum change of ESM temperature that implies
registration in the event log.
7. “ Δ Vibr. Registered” parameter defines a minimum change of vibration that implies registration in
the event log.
8. “ Δ Pannulus registered” parameter defines a minimum change of annulus pressure that implies
registration in the event log.
9. “ Δ Pbuff registered” parameter defines a minimum change of buffer pressure that implies
registration in the event log.
10. “ Δ Pline registered” parameter defines a minimum change of flow line pressure that implies
registration in the event log.
11. “Level annulus registered” parameter defines a minimum change of flow level in annulus that
implies registration in the event log.
12. “ Δ Add. Ain1. registered” parameter defines a minimum change of a parameter, measured through
analog input 1, that implies registration in the event log.
13. “ Δ Add. Ain2. registered” parameter defines a minimum change of a parameter, measured through
analog input 2, that implies registration in the event log.

“Set. regist. custom” second-level menu

116
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

1. “Parameter №1” – “Parameter №7” parameters — for setting registration of a user chosen
parameter in the event log.
2. “ Δ Parameter No.1 registered” – “ Δ Parameter No.7 registered” parameters — for setting minimum
change of a user parameter to be registered in the event log.
For example, if “Parameter №1” option is selected a parameter selection procedure is initiated for setting
the parameter registration. If “Add parameter” option is selected a User goes to main menu of the UMKA-03
controller. The procedure is assumed completed when a required parameter to be displayed is selected in
the menu by User.
If “End list” option is selected after parameter selection the “Absent” option is restored.
“Parameter No. ...” and “ Δ Parameter No. ... registered” parameters are interconnected. For example,
if output frequency is selected as Parameter No.1, “ Δ Parameter No.1 registered “ will be displayed in Hz.

2.3.3.14 “Start-up graph” first-level menu


Start-up graphs depict parameter changes within 30 sec from the start.
The second-level menu contains start-up graphs for the latest 16 starts. Screen of the UMKA-03 controller
with a list of start-up graphs is shown in Figure 2.12.

Figure 2.12 — Screen view of UMKA-03 controller with a list of starting diagrams

Controller allows viewing start-up graphs for the following parameters:


• Total ESM current;
• ESM active current;
• Output frequency;
• ESM current, U phase;
• ESM current, V phase;
• ESM current, W phase.

Screen in the mode of viewing the start-up graph for the ESM active current is shown in Figure 2.13.

117
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Start-up graph name Date and time of the start

Start-up graph of the Active ESM current


Start No

Cursor

Parameter value
at the cursor position

Time expired from the start


(at the cursor position)

s
s

Figure 2.13 — Screen view of UMKA-03 controller in viewing mode of starting diagram of ESM active
current

Cursor movement is controlled by “ ” and “ ” keys. Parameter value corresponding to the cursor
position is displayed by the controller at the bottom of the screen.

118
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

3 Transportation
Variable Speed Drives shall be transported packed.
VSD may be transported by any kind of roofed transport in accordance with applicable laws and
regulations.
Transportation conditions for VSD shall correspond to consequence climate variations:
• ambient temperature of –20 to +60 °C (the characteristic –40 to +60 °C under the order);
• relative humidity 100 % at + 25 °C;
• for content of corrosion-active agents in atmosphere according to UL1332 standard.
Environment shall be non-explosive, free of corrosive gases or vapors in such concentration that may
cause destruction of metals and insulation, and not saturated with current-conducting dust.
Cargo-handling operations with the help of cargo cranes and mechanisms shall be performed by specially
trained personnel proved to have enough labour safety knowledge.
Packed VSD shall be lifted by a forklift loader from below; unpacked Variable Speed Drive by slinging
fixtures located at the upper part. Diagram of slinging is given in Figure 3.1.

Not more than 900

Figure 3.1 — Scheme of VSD slinging

Slinging of the cargo must be performed using slings corresponding to the weight of cargo to be hoisted
with due regard to the number of legs and the sling angle. General duty slings shall be selected so that
the angle between the legs does not exceeded 90°.
It shall be transported as a separate package.

119
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Arrangement and fixing of Variable Speed Drives in a vehicle must ensure their stable position excluding
displacements or impacts against each other and against the vehicle walls.
Keep VSD upright, do not jerk or tilt them (tilt angle shall not exceed 5°) when transporting, loading-
unloading and handling.
VSD must be hoisted and moved smoothly with no jerks or swinging.

No persons shall be under VSD during hoisting, handling or lowering. Variable Speed Drive shall be
lowered only to the intended place where it can not be dropped, turned over or slided down.
VSD must be hoisted and handled only in original packing with due regard to the hoisting machine
load-carrying capacity and values given in the table of allowable loads on loader forks depending on the
center-of-gravity position.
Drive the forklift to the Variable Speed Drive at low Speed; put the forks under it so that the Variable
Speed Drive is well centered to the forks and parallel to their axial line.
Hoisting and handling of VSD is prohibited using only one fork of the forklift loader.
Hoisting and handling of VSD with only one fork is prohibited. When transporting Variable Speed Drives
in motor vehicles, they shall be arranged and fixed so that not to jeopardize pedestrians and other road
users, to prevent their falling out of the truck body and to prevent the vehicle instability.

4 Storage
Storage conditions of the VSD should correspond to the operating conditions for the products with enclosure
protection NEMA 3R as per requirements of NEMA 250-2008 standard (as it pertains to environment
conditions).
Environment shall be non-explosive, free of containing corrosive gases or vapors in such concentration that
may cause destruction of metals and insulation, and not saturated with current-conducting dust.
Maximum storage time before commissioning is 1 year.

120
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

5 Maintenance
5.1 Preparation of the VSD for operation
Preparing of Variable Speed Drives to operation is performed in the following order:
1. Wipe electrical contacts with gasoline of B-70 type.
2. Visually inspect the cabinet and make sure that there are no foreign objects inside.
3. If dust or dirt are revealed, blow the power units, control units, structural and mounting elements
with dry compressed air under pressure of 4 – 6 kg/cm2.

Pay special attention to the heat-sinking surface.

4. Check and, if it’s necessary, tighten all available screw connections of electrical circuits. Pay special
attention to the terminals of external connections (power terminals and control circuit terminals), as
well as the tightening of screw attachments of transistor and thyristor modules.It is recommended
tighten the bolts with torque indicator keys. The tightening torques must correspond with table.
Contact connection Thread diameter of the screw Torque, N*m
М10 22,0±1.5
Circuit breaker
М12 48,0±2
IGBT – modules М8 8
Thyristor modules М8 4
М6 16,0±1
Copper tires М8 32,0±1
М10 45,0±2
Brass I / O terminals М16 60,0±3

Pay special attention to the terminal blocks of external connections (power terminals
and control circuit terminals).

5. Check the state and tightness of plug-and-socket detachable connections of control modules.
6. Check the state of forced-cooling fans (rotational freedom, lack of inadmissible axial and radial
plays, slaps and runouts).
7. Check the state and performance of door hinges and locks, grease rubbing parts if required.
8. Reform DC-link capacitors.

Maintenance and repairs must be performed by trained qualified personnel in accordance with
the requirements of the guidelines and regulations in force at the site of operation.
Variable Speed Drive does not demand constant presence of attendants while in operation.

121
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
During work inside the VSD follow safety directions stated in Part 2.

Periodically, is not more rare than 1 time in 6 months, lead preventive inspection and
audit of VSD:

1. Disconnect voltage of the feed source.


2. Open box doors and doors of cable connection compartments on the back side of the box.
3. Use a voltmeter to make sure that the DC link capacitors are free of voltage.
4. Carry out visual inspection of the box and make sure that the box is free of foreign objects.
5. If dust or dirt is found, blow the power units, control units, structural and mounting elements with
compressed air under pressure of 4 – 6 kg/cm2.

Pay special attention to the heat-sinking surface.

6. Check and tighten, if required, all bolted and screwed connections of electrical circuits.

Pay special attention to the terminal blocks of external connections (power terminals
and control circuit terminals).

7. Control and if necessary tighten all accessible bolt and screwed connections of electric circuits.
8. Check the state of forced-cooling fans (rotational freedom, lack of inadmissible axial and radial
plays, slaps and runouts).
9. Check the state and performance of door hinges and locks, grease rubbing parts if required.

Default of the above-listed requirements can lead to failures and premature failing
of the  VSD. Local color change (discoloration or dimness) of load-bearing elements
of the circuit design, connecting conductors, buses, crimped locks testifies to their
excessive heating and aging.

In order to reform power filter capacitors:


• Connect output terminals of a laboratory autotransformer to a rectifying diode bridge (used diode
bridge should be suitable for voltage not less than 400 V and the current not less than 10 A);
• Open the front door of the VSD. Connect the output of the diode bridge to the buses +Ud and – Ud
with due polarity. The points where the diode bridge shall be connected to the VSD are shown
schematically and physically in Figure 5.1.

122
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

5 4 2 5 4 2 5 4 2

1 1 1

V1 V2 V2
3 3 3
4 4 4

Figure 5.1 — Connections of diode bridge


(are shown on the part of VSD АК06-ХХ-630 electrical schematic diagram)

5.1.1 ADAM modules configuration


ADAM could be installed in the VFD like options.
Before placing a module in a VSD, the modules should be configured. The easiest way to configure the ADAM
modules is use this guideline.
1. Start the AdamApax .NET Utility. You can download this program from //www.advantech.com/ or setup
it from CD, which is packed with modules.
2. Plug in computer AUSB board. It comes with Triol VSD AK06 Drive. AUSB board operation channel
is RS485.
3. The basic hook-up for module configuration is shown in figure 5.3.
AUSB (316)
A
A
B B USB-B
GND

Controller UMKA-03 USB-A

A
B

123
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Figure 5.3 — The basic hook-up for module configuration

4. Unplug UMKA XS1 connector. Unplug ADAM XS1 connector.

Figure 5.4 — The location of connector XS1

5. Set the switch in “INIT” state. Setting can only be changed by putting a module in the INIT* state.
Connect the RS485 cable to ADAM interface input.
AdamApax .NET Utility settings:
• Add comport, with AUSB. See figure 5.5.

124
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Figure 5.5 — Add comport menu

• Select the comport menu and select «Search Device» See figure 5.4
• In pop-up menu press “Start”.
• After the program find ADAM module , press mouse left button and you will see the window as it
shown on the figure 5.6.

Figure 5.6 — The choice of «Search Device»

• Change the highlight parameters from the table below and press the «Apply change».

Type module configuration Address Baudrate Protocol


ADAM-4017+ 23 115000 bps modbus
ADAM-4024 22 115000 bps modbus

125
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Figure 5.7 — Apply change ADAM modules

6. If you have couple ADAM modules, repeat steps 5 and 6 for each unit.
7. Reconstruct the scheme. Put all wires back. Set the switch in “Normal” position.

5.2 Replacement of the transformer unit (universal)

WARNING: Do not connect and disconnect live connections. Electronic control units
of variable speed drives contain components made on the basis of metal-oxide
semiconductor (MOS) technology that is not tolerant to static electricity. If you need to
touch some MOS component, ground your body and the tools to be used. When work-
ing with these units, place them on current-conducting pads.

Within 5 min after switching off the mains power, DC-link capacitors retain the dangerous
charge. Before working inside the cabinet, make sure that the capacitors are free of voltage.
Default of the above-listed requirements can lead to failures and premature failing of
the VSD.

Powering off the VSD it is necessary to:


• stop the motor in the case if it worked;
• if the motor is not running, make sure that there is no standby of the motor reclosure by AR or by
a timer. In the presence of standby (yellow indicator is “Waiting”, there is a corresponding message
on the screen of the UMKA-03 controller), press the STOP button
For powering off the VSD for a work that requires the door to be opened, switch off the automatic circuit
breaker QF1 and QF2.
For replacement of the transformer unit, disconnect control the power and control wiring from the
terminal blocks X6 and relays K1, K2, K3 (see diagram АК06-ХХ-ХХХ-ХХХХХХ-ХХХ).

126
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Then proceed to dismantle the transformer unit from the frame (remove 8 nuts with washers)*, see Fig 5.13.

Figure 5.8 — Dismantling of the transformer unit

The new unit is to be installed in the reverse order.


* Number of connectors may vary depending on the version of the product.

5.3 Replacement of the automatic circuit breaker QF1

WARNING: Do not connect and disconnect live connections. Electronic control units
of variable speed drives contain components made on the basis of metal-oxide
semiconductor (MOS) technology that is not tolerant to static electricity. If you need to
touch some MOS component, ground your body and the tools to be used. When work-
ing with these units, place them on current-conducting pads.

Within 5 min after switching off the mains power, DC-link capacitors retain the dangerous
charge. Before working inside the cabinet, make sure that the capacitors are free of voltage.
Default of the above-listed requirements can lead to failures and premature failing of
the VSD.

Powering off the VSD it is necessary to:


• stop the motor in the case if it worked;
• if the motor is not running, make sure that there is no standby of the motor reclosure by AR or by
a timer. In the presence of standby (yellow indicator is “Waiting”, there is a corresponding message
on the screen of the UMKA-03 controller), press the “STOP” button.
For powering off the VSD for a work that requires the door to be opened, switch off the automatic circuit
breaker QF1.
Make sure there is no applied input voltage during replacement of circuit breakers QF1.

127
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
5.3.1 Replacement of the automatic circuit breaker in 6-pulse
variable speed drive
Dismantle switching mechanism for replacement QF1 switch breaker. Unscrew 4 bolts and take off
lock washer (Figure 5.9).

Figure 5.9 — Dismantling of switch breaker turning on mechanism

Detach power buses from switch breaker and dismantle one (Figure 5.10).

Figure 5.10 — Dismantling of switch breaker

Adjust switching on, switching off and take up state after triggering “Test” of the switch breaker after

128
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

replacement one. Adjust by means of nuts (Figure 5.11).

Figure 5.11 — Adjusting of switch breaker

5.3.2 Replacement of the automatic circuit breaker in 12-pulse


variable speed drive
Dismantle switching mechanism for replacement QF1 switch breakers. Unscrew 4 bolts and take off
lock washer (Figure 5.12).

Figure 5.12 — Dismantling of switch breaker mechanism

Adjust switching on, switching off and take up state after triggering “Test” of the switch breaker after

129
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
replacement QF1. Adjust by means of nuts and bolts see Figure 5.13.

Figure 5.13 — Adjusting of switch breaker

5.4 Replacing module fan

WARNING: Do not connect and disconnect live connections. Electronic control units
of variable speed drives contain components made on the basis of metal-oxide
semiconductor (MOS) technology that is not tolerant to static electricity. If you need to
touch some MOS component, ground your body and the tools to be used. When work-
ing with these units, place them on current-conducting pads.

Within 5 min after switching off the mains power, DC-link capacitors retain the dangerous
charge. Before working inside the cabinet, make sure that the capacitors are free of voltage.
Default of the above-listed requirements can lead to failures and premature failing of
the VSD.

Powering off the VSD it is necessary to:


• stop the motor in the case if it worked;
• if the motor is not running, make sure that there is no standby of the motor reclosure by AR or by
a timer. In the presence of standby (yellow indicator is “Waiting”, there is a corresponding message
on the screen of the UMKA-03 controller), press the STOP button
For powering off the VSD for a work that requires the door to be opened, switch off the automatic circuit
breaker QF1 and QF2.
To replace module fan disconnect power and control wiring from terminal block and relays
(see diagram АК06-ХХ-ХХХ-ХХХХХХ-ХХХ).
Then proceed to dismantle fan compartment cover(remove 4 screws with washers), see Figure 5.14.

130
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Figure 5.14 — Dismantling module fan

Disconnect fan from terminal XT shown in Figure 5.15.

Figure 5.15 — Disconnect fan from terminal XT

Then dismantle fasteners APF module fan (remove 4 screws and washers) and fan, see Figure 5.16.

131
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Figure 5.16 — Dismantling module fan

The new unit is to be installed in the reverse order.

6 Disposal
Parts of the VSD do not contain substances or materials harmful or dangerous to human health and
the environment. They can be disposed of without special precautions.

132
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Annex А
(reference)
Variable speed drive overall dimensions

Figure А1 — Overall dimensions of АК06-ММ/РМ/AM-400 variable speed


drives

133
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Annex B
(mandatory)
Diagram of external VSD connections with ADAM

Variable speed drive


AK06-АM-250-110131-380 Net Description Purpose
ESM ON
ESM COM Normally closed contacts
ESM OFF
+24 V +24 V Power supply of discrete inputs
Pressure gauge Contact pressure gauge Digital input, contact pressure gauge
Ext.prohib. External prohibition External prohibition
Ain 1.1 Analog input 1
Connection sensors of
Ain 1.2 Analog input 2
Ain COM General analog input

Ain 1.3 13 Analog input 3


Ain COM 14 General analog input
Ain 1.4 15 Analog input 4 DME connection sensors
Ain COM 16 General analog input
Ain 1.5 17 Analog input 5
Ain COM 18 General analog input
+24 V 19 +24 V
Power supply
-24 V 20 �24 V
-220 V_QF1 21 Shunt release
Shunt release power supply
-N_QF1 22 Shunt release
-220 V 23 �220 V Power supply 220 V
-220 V 24 �220 V
DIN0 25 Discrete input 0
DIN1 26 Discrete input 1
DIN2 27 Discrete input 2 Discrete inputs
DIN3 28 Discrete input 3
А14 Net

(Y) DATA+ 10 INTERFACE RS-485


(G) DATA- 11 INTERFACE RS-485
(R) +VS 12 ADAM power supply
(B) GND 13

X47
Net Description Purpose
Signal wire
Digital DME RS-485
Signal wire connection
Ground wire
X6 Net Description Purpose
Data transfer
Digital DME RS-232
Received data connection
Ground wire

X3
Net Description Purpose
V
Power supply V DME power supply
V
power transformer
of the step-down
Input 3х380 V

Phase R Net Description Purpose


Phase S Internal/external circuit If jumper is pluged in the terminal
ACVOT-0 ACVOT-0 Riz is measured by variable speed
Phase T drive instead of telemetry system
Neutral
ACVOT-0

Grounding
Ground

Housing ESM
ACVOT

134
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Diagram of external VSD connections without ADAM

X26 Circuit Description Purpose


ESP on
ESP general Normally closed contacts Control of ESM operation
ESP off
+24 V +24 V Power supply of discrete inputs
Pressure gauge Contact pressure gauge Digital input, contact pressure gauge
External blok External block of turning on External block of ESM start
Ain 1.1 Analog input 1
Connection sensors of
Ain 1.2 Analog input 2
submersible telemetry unit
Ain general General analog input
ACS RS485 A+ Signal cable A RS485
Connecting the external ACS
ACS RS485 B- Signal cable B RS485
by RS-485
ACS RS GND Neutral wire RS-485

X25 Circuit Description Purpose


TS RS485 A+ Signal cable A RS485
Connect a digital telemetry
TS RS485 B- Signal cable B RS485 RS-485
TS RS GND Neutral wire RS-485
TMS TXD Data transmission — RS232
TMS RXD
Connect a digital telemetry
Data receiving — RS232
RS-232
TMS GND Neutral wire RS232
Ain 2.1 Analog input 1 Connection sensors of
Ain 2.2 Analog input 2 submer sible telemetry unit
NC
Ain common Common analog input
Din reserve Reserve digital input Reserve digital input
~ 220 V
power transformer

Control circuit ~220 V Telemetry power supply


of the step-down
Input 3х480 V

«Phase A» ~ 220 V
«Phase В» XT12 Circuit Description Purpose
«Phase С»
Internal/external circuit If jumper is pluged in the terminal
«Neutral» «ACVOT-0» Riz is measured by variable speed
«ACVOT-0» drive instead of telemetry system

«ACVOT-0»

Grounding
Ground «Output U»
«Output V»
«Output W»
«Ground» ACVOT ESM

135
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Annex C
(normative)

Instruction on telemetry unit connection


Instruction for connection the «Triol GTM-01-03 (-06)» telemetry unit to the VSD
To install the GTM unit into VSD, the mounting set is included into delivery set of GTM unit. It includes
brackets, fasteners, wires and cable for connection via RS-232 channel.
Before installing the GTM unit into variable speed drive, brackets AT.301561.391, AT.301561.391-01
should be installed on the GTM unit.
Procedure of GTM unit installing into the VSD:
1. Prepare the mounting set (supplied with the GTM unit) as shown in Figure C.1.
2. Using M5 screws attach the brackets to the GTM unit as shown in Figures C.2, C.3 and C.4.
3. Disconnect the VSD. Further all connections should be made with the power supply disconnected.

Install GTM unit into its seat in VSD and fasten it with screws M5.

Figure С.1 — Mounting set for GTM unit installation

136
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Figure С.2 — Brackets installation Figure С.3 — Installation of brackets Figure С.4 — Installation of brackets
АТ.301561.391 АТ.301561.391-01

Procedure of GTM unit installing into the VSD:


1. Ground jumper AT.685616.134 should be connected to the grounding bolt of the GTM unit and to
the ground bus of the VSD.
2. Connect «0-ACVOT» cable of the GTM unit to terminal block XT12 of VSD.
3. Connect star point of transformer. cable to terminal HT12.
4. Using two jumpers AT.685616.133 connect power supply 220 V to terminal X25, contacts 11,12.
5. Connect telemetry unit TMN by RS-485 connector to pins 1, 2, 3 terminal X25 with jumpers
AT.685616.133.
6. Fix the cables with the ties CCV-150 included into the set of GTM unit.

137
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Annex D
(normative)

Description of UMKA-03 controller menu


Table D1 — Description of UMKA-03 controller menu

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
ESM actual parameters Menu 1 level
Output frequency Inform. 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz – 655.35 Hz
ESM current, phase U Inform. 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3276.7 A
ESM current, phase V Inform. 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3276.7 A
ESM current, phase W Inform. 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3276.7 A
Current unbalance Inform. 0.00 % 0.00 % 0.00 % – 327.67 %
ESM active current Inform. 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3276.7 A
Total ESM current Inform. 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3276.7 A
Efficiency factor Inform. 0.000 0 0.000 – 1.000
Load factor Inform. 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 % – 999.9 %
20000
Current R ins Inform. 0 kOhm 0 kOhm – 32767 kOhm
kOhm
Freq. backspin Inform. 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz – 800.0 Hz
Active power Inform. 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW – 32767 kW
Total power Inform. 0 kVA 0 kVA 0 kVA – 32767 kVA
ESM voltage Inform. 0V 0V 0 V – 9999 V
VSD actual parameters Menu 1 level
Output frequency Inform. 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz – 655.35 Hz
Ud voltage Inform. 527 V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
Iout VSD phase U Inform. 0A 0A 0 A – 32767 A
Iout VSD phase V Inform. 0A 0A 0 A – 32767 A
Iout VSD phase W Inform. 0A 0A 0 A – 32767 A
U filter current Inform. 0A 0A 0 A – 32767 A
V filter current Inform. 0A 0A 0 A – 32767 A
W filter current Inform. 0A 0A 0 A – 32767 A
VSD active current Inform. 0A 0A 0 A – 32767 A
VSD total current Inform. 0A 0A 0 A – 32767 A
RS input voltage Inform. 0V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
ST input voltage Inform. 0V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
TR input voltage Inform. 0V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
In. voltage unbal. Inform. 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 % – 3276.7 %
U phase IGBT temp. Inform. 112.7 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 150.0 °С
V phase IGBT temp. Inform. 112.7 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 150.0 °С

138
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
W phase IGBT temp. Inform. 112.8 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 150.0 °С
Output Voltage Inform. 0V 0V 0 V – 500 V
Id current Inform. 0.3 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3276.7 A
Current phase rotation Inform. CBA ABC [ABC, CBA]
Modes of operation Menu 1 level
Manual/automatic Menu 2 level
Operating mode Set value Manual Manual [Manual, Automatic]
[Manual F,
ProgramF,CurrRegulator,
Suction Pressure,
Wellhead Pressure,
Annulus pressure,
Maintain pararmeter Set value Manual F Manual F Line pressure, Annulus
level, ESM Act Power,
ESM pressure,
AmbienTemp,
ESM Temp, XY Vibr,
Z vibr, Manual U]
Rotation direction Set value Direct Direct [Direct, Reverse]
Output frequency Set value 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz – 655.35 Hz
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Speed pot Source Set value Ain2.3 Ain2.3 Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4,]
Frequency setting Set value 50.02 Hz 50.00 Hz 0.00 Hz – 80.00 Hz
Power-on start Set value Disable Disable [Disable, Permit]
Restart time Set value 30 s 30 s 1 s – 9999 s
Running-
Deceleration method Set value Running-out [Running-out, Dynamic]
out
[Not available,
VSDESP current,
ESM Irated,
Not avail- PID feedback,
Setting error Set value Not available
able U/F set, Power part,
Open-circuit current,
Current setting,
Impact time]
I-Sync Menu 2 level
I-Sync On/Off Set value Off Off [Off, On]
I-Sync amperage Inform. 1.5 A 1.5 A
I-Sync percent Set value 150 % 150 % 10...150 %

139
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
I-Sync delay Set value 2s 2s 1...5 s
I-Limit Prop U Set value 0.010 V 0.010 V 0.001...0.050 V
Program mode Menu 2 level
[Manual F,
ProgramF, CurrRegulator,
Suction Pressure,
Wellhead Pressure,
Annulus pressure,
Operating mode Set value Manual F Manual F Line pressure, Annulus
level, ESM Act Power,
ESM pressure,
AmbienTemp,
ESM Temp, XY Vibr,
Z vibr, Manual U]
Output frequency Set value 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz – 655.35 Hz
Prog. mode act. Setting Set value 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz – 80.00 Hz
Start. freq. Set value 40.00 Hz 40.00 Hz 5.00 Hz – 80.00 Hz
End freq. Set value 50.00 Hz 50.00 Hz 5.00 Hz – 80.00 Hz
Change time Set value 00:01 00:01 00:01 – 546:07
One One [One start-up,
Prog. freq. change Set value
start-up start-up Every start-up]
Underload init. Seting Set value 50.0 % 50.0 % 0.0 % – 100.0 %
Current regulator Menu 2 level
[Manual F,
ProgramF,CurrRegulator,
Suction Pressure,
Wellhead Pressure,
Annulus pressure,
Maintain parameter Set value Manual F Manual F Line pressure, Annulus
level, ESM Act Power,
ESM pressure,
AmbienTemp,
ESM Temp, XY Vibr,
Z vibr, Manual U]
Total ESM current Set value 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3276.7 A
Current setting 100.1 A 100.0 A 1.0 A – 2000.0 A

140
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Non-technol. parameter
Menu 2 level
regulator
[Manual F, Program F,
Curr Regulator, Suc-
tion Pressure, Wellhead
Pressure, Annulus
pressure, Line pres-
Maintain parameter Set value Manual F Manual F sure, Annulus level,
ESM Act Power, ESM
pressure,
AmbienTemp, ESM
Temp, XY Vibr, Z vibr,
Manual U]
Current value PID Set value 0 at 0 at 0 at – 9999 at
Setting 5002 0 0 – 65535
[Not available, VSDESP
current, ESM Irated,
PID feedback,
Not avail-
Setting error Set value Not available U/F set, Power part,
able
Open-circuit current,
Current setting,
Impact time]
Intake press. Setting Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Wellhead press. Setting Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Annulus press. Setting Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Line press. Setting Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Annulus level setting Set value 0m 0m 0 m – 3000 m
Active Power Setting Set value 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW – 4000 kW
Compensator Pressure Setting Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Amb Temperature Setting Set value 0.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 400.0 °С
ESM Temperature Setting Set value 0.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 400.0 °С
XY Vibration Setting Set value 0.00 m/s 2
0.00 m/s 2
0.00 m/с2 – 40.00 m/s2
Z Vibration Setting Set value 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/с2 – 40.00 m/s2
PID parameters Menu 2 level
Control direction Set value Direct Direct [Direct, Reverse]
Proportional Gain Set value 0.300 0.3 0.000 – 9.999
Integral gain Set value 0.300 0,3 0,000 – 9,999
Derivative gain Set value 0,100 0,1 0,000 – 9.999
Control period Set value 10.0 s 10.0 s 0.1 s – 999.9 s

141
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Operation by timer Menu 2 level
[Disable, With stop,
Prog. Operation Set value Disable Disable
With Freq. 2]
Prog. operation time Set value 30 min 30 min 1 min – 32767 min
Prog. stop time Set value 10 min 60 min 1 min – 32767 min
T before timer state change Set value 00:30:00 00:00:00
Timer state Set value Stop Stop [Stop, Operation]
Shaking Menu 2 level
Shaking Set value Disable Disable [Disable, Permit]
Shaking period Set value 30 min 30 min 1 min – 1000 min
Amount of shakings Set value 2 2 0 – 99
F1 frequency Set value 40.00 Hz 40.00 Hz 1.00 Hz – 80.00 Hz
F2 frequency Set value 45.00 Hz 45.00 Hz 1.00 Hz – 80.00 Hz
Acceleration rate Set value 10.0 Hz/s 10.0 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s – 60.0 Hz/s
Deceleration rate Set value 10.0 Hz/s 10.0 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s – 60,0 Hz/s
Time before shaking Set value 00:00:00 00:00:00 00:00:00 – 02:46:39
Gas stopping mode Menu 2 level
Gas stopping mode Set value Disable Disable [Disable, Permit]
Ion.pr Set value 70 % 70 % 0...100 %
Iоff.pr Set value 105 % 105 % 0...150 %
F1ad.pr Set value 55 Hz 55 Hz 0...80 Hz
F2ad.pr Set value 45 Hz 45 Hz 0...80 Hz
Тpr Set value 60 s 60 s 1...65535 s
Тad.pr Set value 5s 5s 1...65535 s
Тmov.pr Set value 2 Hz 2 Hz 0,10...80,00 Hz
Тbr.rp Set value 2 Hz 2 Hz 0,10...80,00 Hz
Current optimization Menu 2 level
Ioptim. Search Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Limit Urated + Set value 20 V 20 V 1 V – 50 V
Limit Urated - Set value 20 V 20 V 1 V – 50 V
U/F curr. Urated Set value 380 V 100 V 100 V – 1000 V
Search period Set value 10 min 10 min 0 min – 9999 min
Filtration coefficient Set value 3.0 % 3.0 % 0.1 % – 10.0 %
Total ESM current Set value 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3276.7 A
[Waiting, Decrease U,
Optimization state Set value Off Waiting
Increase U, Off]

142
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Diagnostic modes Menu 2 level
[Off,
Step-up transformer,
Test mode Set value Off Off
Turbine rotation unit,
Loading]
379 Step-up tr. power Set value 0 kVA 0 kVA 0 kVA – 9999 kVA
SC in windings Set value Not tested Not tested [Not tested, No, Yes]
Low-voltage side breakdown Set value Not tested Not tested [Not tested, No, Yes]
Faulty Backspin Unit Set value Not tested Not tested [Not tested, No, Yes]
VSD current reference (loading) Set value 100.0 A 100.0 A 50.0 A – 2000.0 A
Leakage current Set value 0.5 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3276.7 A
Leakage current set value Set value 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A – 5.0 A
Modes of start Menu 1 level
[Soft,
With synchronization,
Startup mode Set value Swinging Soft
Jogging, Swinging ,
Unblocking, Hard]
Acceleration rate Set value 5.00 Hz/s 1.00 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s – 60.00 Hz/s
Deceleration rate Set value 5.00 Hz/s 1.00 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s – 60.00 Hz/s
Jog frequency Set value 20.00 Hz 5.00 Hz 1.00 Hz – 20.00 Hz
Jog voltage Set value 120 % 120 % 100 % – 300 %
Jog time Set value 20 s 2s 1 s – 50 s
Jog count Set value 5 10 1 – 20
Unlocking Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Locked Set value No No [No, Yes]
Drive settings Menu 1 level
U/F characteristic Menu 2 level
Starting frequency Set value 4.00 Hz 1.50 Hz 1.00 Hz – 50.00 Hz
Point1 frequency Set value 10 Hz 10 Hz 1.50 Hz – 50.00 Hz
Point1 Voltage Set value 76 V 76 V 0 V – 380 V
Point2 frequency Set value 20 Hz 20 Hz 1.50 Hz – 50.00 Hz
Point2 Voltage Set value 152 V 152 V 0 V – 380 V
Point3 frequency Set value 30 Hz 30 Hz 1.50 Hz – 50.00 Hz
Point3 Voltage Set value 228 V 228 V 0 V – 380 V
Point4 frequency Set value 50 Hz 50 Hz 1.50 Hz – 50.00 Hz
Point4 Voltage Set value 380 V 380 V 0 V – 380 V
Min. freq. limit Set value 30.00 Hz 30.00 Hz 1.00 Hz – 50.00 Hz

143
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Max. freq. limit Set value 200.00 Hz 50.00 Hz 10.00 Hz – 80.00 Hz
Rectifier U/F Set value No No [No, Yes]
ESM currents calibration Menu 2 level
ESM current, phase U Set value 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3200.0 A
Cur. comp. factor phase U Set value 100.0 % 100.0 % 50.0 % – 200.0 %
ESM current, phase V Set value 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3200.0 A
Cur. comp. factor phase V Set value 100.0 % 100.0 % 50.0 % – 200.0 %
ESM current, phase W Set value 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3200.0 A
Cur. comp. factor phase W Set value 100.0 % 100.0 % 50.0 % – 200.0 %
Full-load current Set value 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3200.0 A
FL cur. comp. factor Set value 100.0 % 100.0 % 97.5 % – 102.5 %
Input voltages calibration Menu 2 level
RS in. voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 1000 V
ADC comp. Uab Set value 100.0 % 100.0 % 50.0 % – 200.0 %
ST in. voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 1000 V
ADC comp. Ubc Set value 100.0 % 100.0 % 50.0 % – 200.0 %
TR in. voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 1000 V
ADC in. voltage Set value 100.0 % 100.0 % 50.0 % – 200.0 %
Alarms Menu 1 level
Overload Menu 2 level
Total ESM current Set value 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 3276.7 A
Overload set value in percent Set value 105.0 % 105.0 % 50.0 % – 200.0 %
Overload setpoint Set value 1.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A – 2.0 A
Starting time Set value 0.0 s 30.0 s 0.0 s – 999.9 s
Overload trip delay Set value 10 s 10 s 0 s – 1200 s
Automatic [Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off
Restart Automatic Restart]
Number of overload restarts Set value 4 3 1 – 10
Overload restart delay Set value 13 min 10 min 1 min – 9999 min
Fast trip Set value Disable Disable [Disable, Permit]
Underload Menu 2 level
Total ESM current Information 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A – 999.9 A
Load factor Information 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 % – 999.9 %
Underload set value Information 51.0 % 50.0 % 0.0 % – 100.0 %
Underload set value in percent Information 51.0 % 50.0 % 0.0 % – 100.0 %
Underload setpoint Set value 1.0 A 1.0 A 0.0...1.0 A

144
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 999.9 s
Underload trip delay Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 3600 s
Automatic [Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off
Restart Automatic Restart]
Number of underload restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 10
Underload restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 9999 min
Setting delay ARS Information 10 min 10 min 1 min – 9999 min
Time progress ARS Set value 0 min 0 min 1 min – 9999 min
Current unbalance Menu 2 level
Current unbalance Set value 0.00 % 0.00 % 0.00 % – 327.67 %
VSD input сurrent unbalance Set value 0.00 % 0.00 % 0.00 % – 327.67 %
Cur. unbal. set value Set value 20.00 % 20.00 % 0.00 % – 99.99 %
Starting time Set value 4.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 999.9 s
Stop delay Set value 31 s 30 s 0 s – 9999 s
Automatic Automatic [Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value
Restart Restart Automatic Restart]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 99
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 1200 min
Insulation Menu 2 level
20000
Current R ins Set value 0 kOhm 0 kOhm – 60000 kOhm
kOhm
R ins set value Set value 30 kOhm 30 kOhm 0 kOhm – 32767 kOhm
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s
OFF time Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 65535 s
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 10
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
Ris Comp Coefficient Set value 100.0 % 100.0 % 50.0 % – 200.0 %
Frequency backspin
Menu 2 level
(turbine rotation)
Direction catch-on-the-fly Set value Direct Direct [Direct, Reverse]
Freq. backspin Set value 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz – 800.0 Hz
F max set value Set value 4.0 Hz 4.0 Hz 0.0 Hz – 80.0 Hz
Protection Set value On On [Off, On]
ESM Turb. rot. Deceleration Set value On On [Off, On]
COTF Number of ARS Set value 3 3 1 – 10

145
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
COTF Restart delay Set value 10 min 2 min 1 min – 30 min
With
With synchro- [With synchronization,
Catch-on-the-fly Set value synchro-
nization Without synchronization]
nization
I-Sync On/Off Set value On On [Off, On]
I-Sync amperage Information 1,5 А 1,5 А 1,0 А – 2000,0 А
I-Sync percent Set value 150 % 150 % 10 % – 150 %
I-Sync delay Set value 2s 2s 1s–5s
I-Sync Prop U Set value 0,010 V 0,010 V 0,001 V – 0,050 V
Low line voltage Menu 2 level
RS input voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
ST input voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
TR input voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
U input min set value Set value 50 % 50 % 0 % – 100 %
U input min set value (480 V) Set value 50 % 50 % 0 % – 100 %
Starting time Set value 4.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 999.9 s
Stop delay Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 9999 s
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Restart time Set value 30 s 30 s 1 s – 9999 s
Volt. Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 99
High line voltage Menu 2 level
RS input voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
ST input voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
TR input voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
U input max set value Set value 120 % 120 % 0 % – 150 %
U input min set value (480 V) Set value 50 % 50 % 0 % – 100 %
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 999.9 s
Stop delay Set value 31 s 30 s 0 s – 9999 s
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Restart time Set value 30 s 30 s 1 s – 9999 s
Volt. Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 99
Unbalance of line voltage Menu 2 level
RS input voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 32767 V

146
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
ST input voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
TR input voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
In. voltage unbal. Set value 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 % – 3276.7 %
Line Unbal. set value Set value 20.0 % 20.0 % 0.0 % – 100.0 %
Starting time Set value 10.0 s 10.0 s 0.0 s – 999.9 s
Stop delay Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 1200 s
Automatic Automatic [Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value
Restart Restart Automatic Restart]
Restart time Set value 30 s 30 s 1 s – 9999 s
Volt. Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 99
Voltage of direct current
Menu 2 level
circuit
Ud voltage Set value 527 V 0V 0 V – 32767 V
Min Ud set value Set value 200 V 200 V 250 V – 700 V
Max Ud set value Set value 680 V 680 V 500 V – 790 V
Min Ud set value (480 V) Set value 450 V 450 V 250 V – 700 V
Max Ud set value (480 V) Set value 760 V 760 V 500 V – 790 V
Automatic Automatic [Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value
Restart Restart Automatic Restart]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 10
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 9999 min
Power switches overheating Menu 2 level
U phase IGBT temp. Set value 112.7 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 150.0 °С
V phase IGBT temp. Set value 112.7 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 150.0 °С
W phase IGBT temp. Set value 112.8 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 150.0 °С
T input Pow switch max Set value 0.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 3276.7 °С
OFF temp.IGBT Set value 120.0 °С 90.0 °С 20.0 °С – 120.0 °С
Automatic Automatic [Lockout,
Protection Set value
Restart Restart Automatic Restart ]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 99
Restart delay Set value 20 min 20 min 1 min – 9999 min
Overcurrent Menu 2 level
VSD total current Set value 0A 0A 0 A – 32767 A
Overcurrent protection Set value 0A 0A 1 A – 6500 A
Automatic [Lockout,
Protection Set value Lockout
Restart Automatic Restart ]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 10

147
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 9999 min
Power switches Menu 2 level
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1–5
Restart delay Set value 1 min 1 min 1 min – 9999 min
Automatic Automatic [Lockout,
Protection Set value
Restart Restart Automatic Restart ]
Low frequency Menu 2 level
Output frequency Set value 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz – 655.35 Hz
Min. frequency Set value 30.01 Hz 30.00 Hz 0.00 Hz – 99.99 Hz
Starting time Set value 30.0 s 30.0 s 0.0 s – 999.9 s
Stop delay Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 9999 s
Automatic [Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off
Restart Automatic Restart]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 10
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 9999 min
Door Menu 2 level
Electric interlock Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Door Set value Opened Closed [Closed, Opened]
Automatic OFF VSD at door open Off Off [Off, On]
Phase rotation Menu 2 level
Ph. seq. protection Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Current phase rotation Set value CBA ABC [ABC, CBA]
High pressure Menu 2 level
High pressure Source Set value DIN1 DIN1 [DIN1, DIN2]
Active level Set value log.1 log.1 [log.0, log.1]
Protection Set value Enable Enable [Enable, Disable]
Connection with ACS Menu 2 level
Protection ACS Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Off time Set value 0s 0s 0...9999 s
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 10
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 9999 min
Connection with DME Menu 2 level
Protection DME Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Off time Set value 0s 0s 0...9999 s
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 10
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 9999 min
Connection with ADAM Menu 2 level

148
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Protection ADAM Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Off time Set value 0s 0s 0...9999 s
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 10
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 9999 min
ARS counters Menu 2 level
ARS counters Set value Do not clear Do not clear [Do not clear, Clear]
ARSCountResetVolt Set value 1440 min 1440 min 1 min – 65535 min
ARSCountResetOverload Set value 1440 min 1440 min 1 min – 65535 min
ARSCountResetUnderload Set value 1440 min 1440 min 1 min – 65535 min
ARSCountResetCurUnbal Set value 1440 min 1440 min 1 min – 65535 min
ARSCountResetOther Set value 4320 min 4320 min 1 min – 65535 min
TimeToCountResetVolt Set value 0 min 1440 min 0 min – 65535 min
TimeToCountResetOverload Set value 0 min 1440 min 0 min – 65535 min
TimeToCountResetUnderload Set value 0 min 1440 min 0 min – 65535 min
TimeToCountResetCurUnbal Set value 0 min 1440 min 0 min – 65535 min
TimeToCountResetOther Set value 3227 min 4320 min 0 min – 65535 min
ARSnumbCounterOverload Set value 0 0 0 – 65535
ARSnumbCounterUnderload Set value 0 0 0 – 65535
ARSnumbCountCurUnbal Set value 0 0 0 – 65535
ARSCountReset Manual Set value Permit Permit [Disable, Permit]
Downhole measure equipment Menu 1 level
Analog inputs set-up Menu 2 level
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Ain. Input type 1 Set value 0–10 V 0–10 V
4–20 mA]
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Ain. Input type 2 Set value 4–20 mA 4–20 mA
4–20 mA]
Analog Input 1.1 value Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
Analog Input 1.2 value Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
Analog Input 1.3 value Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
Analog Input 1.4 value Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
Analog Input 1.5 value Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
Analog Input 1.6 value Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
Analog Input 1.7 value Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
Analog Input 1.8 value Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
Analog Input 2.1 value Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
Analog Input 2.2 value Set value 0 0 0 – 4096

149
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Analog Input 2.3 value Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
Analog Input 2.4 value Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
AI1 zero measurement Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
AI1 5mA measurement Set value 3742 3742 0 – 4096
AI1 10V measurement Set value 3723 3723 0 – 4096
AI1 20 mA measurement Set value 3300 3300 0 – 4096
AI2 zero measurement Set value 0 0 0 – 4096
AI2 5mA measurement Set value 3742 3742 0 – 4096
AI2 10V measurement Set value 3723 3723 0 – 4096
AI2 20 mA measurement Set value 3300 3300 0 – 4096
Downhool Tool Menu 2 level
Status Information - - -
[No, Borets, Izhevsk,
TMS-1, TMS-2,
WoodGroup, Triol,
Protocol DME Set value No No Phoenix, SKAD-2002,
Centrilift, Alnas,
TMSN-3, Novomet,
Phoenix PICv2, SPT-2]
[2.4 kB, 4.8 kB,
9.6 kB, 19.2 kB,
DME exchange rate Set value 9.6 kB 9.6 kB
38.4 kB, 57.6 kB,
76.8 kB, 115.2 kB]
DME address Set value 1 1 1 – 254
Not [Not identified,
DME Set value Not identified
identified Identified]
Auto-Setup Set value No No [No, Yes]
20000
Current R ins Information 0 kOhm 0 kOhm – 32767 kOhm
kOhm
Intake Pressure Information 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Compensator pressure Information 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Amb. Temperature Information 0.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
ESM oil temperature Information 0.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
XY vibration Information 0.00 m/s 2
0.00 m/s 2
0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
Z vibration Information 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
Pump discharge press. Information 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Pump Discharge Temperature Information 0.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
Delivery rate Information 0.00 m /h
3
0.00 m /h3
0.00 m3/h – 99.99 m3/h
Radial motor vibration Information 0.0 mm/s 0.0 mm/s 0.0 mm/s – 40.0 mm/s

150
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Axial motor vibration Information 0.0 mm/s 0.0 mm/s 0,0 mm/s – 40.0 mm/s
ESM winding temperature Information 0.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
Current Leakage TM Information 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0,0 mA – 40.0 mA
Tool Current Information 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0,0 mA – 40.0 mA
Tool Voltage Information 0.0 V 0.0 V 0.0 °С – 300.0 V
Intake pressure Menu 2 level
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
IP Source Set value Not available Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4, DME]
Intake Pressure Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 700.00 at

OFF lower limit Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 700.00 at

ON upper limit Set value 20.00 at 400.00 at 0.00 at – 700.00 at


Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s
OFF time Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 65535 s
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Protect on MIN in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 9999
Restart delay Set value 11 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Input type Set value 0 – 10 V 0 – 5 mA
4–20 mA]
[X.XX at, X.XXX MPa,
Display format Set value X.XX at X.XX at
X.XX kg/sm2, X.X psi]
Scale minimum Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Scale maximum Set value 30.00 at 400.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Normaliz.of the pressure Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Compensator pressure Menu 2 level
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Not
CP Source Set value Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
available
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4, DME]
Compensator pressure Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 700.00 at
OFF lower limit Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 700.00 at
ON upper limit Set value 20.00 at 200.00 at 0.00 at – 700.00 at
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s

151
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
OFF time Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 65535 s
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Protect on MAX in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Protect on MIN in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 9999
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Input type Set value 0–10 V 0–5 mA
4–20 mA]
[X.XX at, X.XXX MPa,
Display format Set value X.XX at X.XX at
X.XX kg/sm2, X.X psi]
Scale minimum Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Scale maximum Set value 30.00 at 400.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Amb. Temperature Menu 2 level
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Not
AT Source Set value Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
available
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4, DME]
Amb. Temperature Set value 0.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
OFF lower limit Set value 0.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
ON upper limit Set value 150.0 °С 150.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s
OFF time Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 65535 s
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Protect on MAX in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Protect on MIN in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 9999
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Input type Set value 0–10 V 0–5 mA
4–20 mA]
Display format Set value X.X °C X.X °C [X.X °C, X °C, X.X °F, X °F]
Scale minimum Set value 0.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
Scale maximum Set value 150.0 °С 150.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
ESM oil temperature Menu 2 level

152
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Not
TESM Source Set value Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
available
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4, DME]
ESM oil temperature Set value 0.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
ON lower limit Set value 1.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
ON upper limit Set value 150.0 °С 150.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s
OFF time Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 65535 s
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Protect on MAX in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Protect on MIN in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 9999
Restart delay Set value 11 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Input type Set value 0 – 10 V 0 – 5 mA
4–20 mA]
Display format Set value X.X °C X.X °C [X.X °C, X °C, X.X °F, X °F]
Scale minimum Set value 0.0 °С 0.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
Scale maximum Set value 150.0 °С 150.0 °С 0.0 °С – 300.0 °С
Start the T PED Set value Off Off [Off, On]
ESM Vibration Menu 2 level
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Not avail-
XY source Set value Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
able
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4, DME]
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Z source Set value Not available Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4, DME]
XY vibration Set value 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
Z vibration Set value 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
OFF lower limit Set value 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
ON upper limit Set value 2.00 m/s2 2.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s

153
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
OFF time Set value 50 s 50 s 0 s – 65535 s
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Protect on MAX in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Protect on MIN in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 9999
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Input type Set value 0–10 V 0–5 mA
4–20 mA]
[X.XX m/s2, X.X m/s2,
Display format Set value X.XX m/s 2
X.XX m/s 2
X m/s2, X.XXX g, X.XX g,
X.X g]
Scale minimum Set value 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
Scale maximum Set value 50.00 m/s2 50.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
Pump Vibration Menu 2 level
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Not avail-
XY source Set value Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
able
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4, DME]
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Z source Set value Not available Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4, DME]
XY vibration Set value 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
Z vibration Set value 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
OFF lower limit Set value 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
ON upper limit Set value 2.00 m/s2 2.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s
OFF time Set value 50 s 50 s 0 s – 65535 s
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Protect on MAX in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Protect on MIN in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 9999
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Input type Set value 0–10 V 0–5 mA
4–20 mA]

154
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
[X.XX m/s2, X.X m/s2,
Display format Set value X.XX m/s 2
X.XX m/s 2
X m/s2, X.XXX g, X.XX g,
X.X g]
Scale minimum Set value 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
Scale maximum Set value 50.00 m/s2 50.00 m/s2 0.00 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
Annulus pressure Menu 2 level
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Not avail-
AP Source Set value Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
able
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4, DME]
Annulus pressure Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
OFF lower limit Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
ON upper limit Set value 10.00 at 200.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s
OFF time Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 65535 s
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Protect on MAX in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Protect on MIN in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 9999
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Input type Set value 0 – 10 V 0 – 5 mA
4–20 mA]
[X.XX at, X.XXX MPa,
Display format Set value X.XX at X.XX at
X.XX kg/sm2, X.X psi]
Scale minimum Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Scale maximum Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Discharge pressure Menu 2 level
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
BP Source Set value Not available Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4, DME]
Wellhead pressure Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Minimum Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Maximum Set value 10.00 at 200.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s
OFF time Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 65535 s

155
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Protect on MAX in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Protect on MIN in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 9999
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Input type Set value 0–10 V 0–5 mA
4–20 mA]
[X.XX at, X.XXX MPa,
Display format Set value X.XX at X.XX at
X.XX kg/sm2, X.X psi]
Scale minimum Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Scale maximum Set value 0.00 at 400.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Line pressure Menu 2 level
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Pline Source Set value Not available Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4, DME]
Flow line pressure Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
OFF lower limit Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
ON upper limit Set value 10.00 at 200.00 at 0.00 at – 400.00 at
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s
OFF time Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 65535 s
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Protect on MAX in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Protect on MIN in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 1 – 9999
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Input type Set value 0 – 10 V 0 – 5 mA
4–20 mA]
[X.XX at, X.XXX MPa,
Display format Set value X.XX at X.XX at
X.XX kg/sm2, X.X psi]
Scale minimum Set value 0.00 at 0.00 at 0.00 at – 700.00 at
Scale maximum Set value 0.00 at 400.00 at 0.00 at – 700.00 at
Annulus fluid level Menu 2 level

156
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Annulus level Source Set value Not available Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4, DME]
Annulus level Set value 0m 0m 0 m – 9999 m
ON lower limit Set value 0m 0m 0 m – 9999 m
ON upper limit Set value 100 m 100 m 0 m – 9999 m
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s
OFF time Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 65535 s
[Lockout,
Protection Set value
Automatic Restart]
Protect on MAX in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Protect on MIN in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 0 – 9999
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Input type Set value 0 – 10 V 0 – 5 mA
4–20 mA]
Scale minimum Set value 0m 0m 0 m – 9999 m
Scale maximum Set value 0m 0m 0 m – 9999 m
Low pressure Menu 2 level
Current value Set value Inactive Inactive [Inactive, Active]
Active level Set value log.1 log.1 [log.0, log.1]
Starting time Set value 3.0 s 3.0 s 0.0 s – 999.9 s
OFF time Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 9999 s
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Number of restarts Set value 3 3 0 – 10
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 9999 min
Additional analog input 1 Menu 2 level
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Not avail-
Add. Ain1 Source Set value Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
able
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4]
Add. Ain1. Set value 0 m3/h 0.0 V 0 m3/h – 6553.5 m3/h
OFF lower limit Set value 0 m3/h 0.0 V 0 m3/h – 6553.5 m3/h
ON upper limit Set value 10 m /h3
10.0 V 0 m3/h – 6553.5 m3/h
Control delay Set value 30.0 s 30.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s
OFF delay Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 65535 s

157
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Protect on MAX in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Protect on MIN in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
ARS number Set value 3 3 1 – 9999
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Input type Set value 0–10 V 0–5 mA
4–20 mA]
Units of measurement Set value m3/h V
[XXXX, XXX.X,
Display format Set value XXX.X XXX.X
XX.XX, X.XXX]
Scale minimum Set value 0 m3/h 0.0 V 0 m3/h – 6553.5 m3/h
Scale maximum 10 m3/h 10.0 V 0 m3/h – 6553.5 m3/h
Additional analog input 2 Menu 2 level
[Not available, Ain1.1,
Ain1.2, Ain1.3, Ain1.4,
Not avail-
Add. Ain2 Source Set value Not available Ain1.5, Ain1.6, Ain1.7,
able
Ain1.8, Ain2.1, Ain2.2,
Ain2.3, Ain2.4]
Add. Ain2 Set value 0V 0.0 V 0 V – 6553.5 V
OFF lower limit Set value 0V 0.0 V 0 V – 6553.5 V
ON upper limit Set value 10 V 10.0 V 0 V – 6553.5 V
Control delay Set value 30.0 s 30.0 s 0.0 s – 6553.5 s
OFF delay Set value 30 s 30 s 0 s – 65535 s
[Off, Lockout,
Protection Set value Off Off
Automatic Restart]
Protect on MAX in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
Protect on MIN in STOP Set value Yes Yes [Yes, No]
ARS number Set value 3 3 1 – 9999
Restart delay Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 65535 min
[0–5 mA, 0–10 V,
Input type Set value 0 – 10 V 0 – 5 mA
4–20 mA]
Units of measurement Set value V V
[XXXX, XXX.X,
Display format Set value XXX.X XXX.X
XX.XX, X.XXX]
Scale minimum Set value 0V 0.0 V 0 V – 6553.5 V
Scale maximum Set value 10 V 10.0 V 0 V – 6553.5 V
Installation parameters Menu 1 level
[Asynchronous,
Drive type Set value AC L Asynchronous
AC el. Motor, AC L]

158
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Filter Sin Set value On On [Off, On]
Field No Set value 1 1 0 – 65535
Cluster No. Set value 2 1 0 – 65535
Well No. Set value 1 1 0 – 65535
Nominal voltage Set value 380 V 380 V 380 V – 10000 V
ESM rated current Set value 45.0 A 1.0 A 1.0 A – 2000.0 A
Motor rated PF Set value 0.850 0.85 0.500 – 1.000
Step-up tr. power Set value 0 kVA 0 kVA 0 kVA – 9999 kVA
ESM rated power Set value 0 kW 0 kW 0 kW – 65535 kW
ESP rated efficiency Set value 15 kub/s 0 kub/s 0 kub/s – 65535 kub/s
ESP head Set value 1m 0m 0 m – 65535 m
Setting depth Set value 0m 0m 0 m – 65535 m
ESM rated voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 5000 V
Motor rated freq. Set value 200.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 3.5 Hz – 100.0 Hz
Idle motor rated cur Set value 0.1 A 0.1 A 0.1 A – 2000.0 A
Work voltage Set value 480 V 480 V [380 V, 415 V, 480 V]
Brake chopper voltage on Set value 750 V 750 V [450...790 V]
Brake chopper voltage off Set value 740 V 740 V [450...790 V]
Power system Set value 50 Hz 50 Hz [50 Hz, 60 Hz]
Set Bypass Set value Off Offо [Off, On]
Filter capacity manual Set value 0 0 0...32767
Reserve DCC Set value 100 % 100 % 0...100 %
R-phase current Information 0А 0А 0 А – 32767 А
S-phase current Information 0А 0А 0 А – 32767 А
T-phase current Information 0А 0А 0 А – 32767 А
Calc.of step-up transf.tap
Menu 1 level
voltage
ESM rated voltage Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 5000 V
ESM rated current Set value 45.0 A 1.0 A 1.0 A – 2000.0 A
Reference freq. Set value 50.00 Hz 50.00 Hz 0.00 Hz – 80.00 Hz
Reference voltage Set value 350 V 350 V 110 V – 600 V
[16 mm2, 21 mm2,
Cable cross section Set value 16 mm2 16 mm2
25 mm2, 33 mm2]
Setting depth Set value 0m 0m 0 m – 65535 m
Reservoir temp. Set value 90 °С 90 °С 0 °С – 200 °С
Recommended U step-up
Set value 0V 0V 0 V – 5000 V
trans.
Prim winding voltage Set value 380 V 380 V 0 V – 800 V

159
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
K. Transform Set value 1.00 1.00 0.01...655.35
Step-up tr. tap U Set value 380 V 380 V 380 V – 10000 V
System Menu 1 level
Passwords Menu 2 level
User password 1 Set value 1 1 1 – 65535
User password 2 Set value 1 1 1 – 65535
User password 3 Set value 1 1 1 – 65535
User password 4 Set value 1 1 1 – 65535
User password 5 Set value 1 1 1 – 65535
User password 6 Set value 1 1 1 – 65535
User password 7 Set value 1 1 1 – 65535
Processman password Set value 2 2 1 – 65535
Manufacturer password Set value ***** ***** 1 – 65535
View only Set value No No [No, Yes]
Password protection Off Off [Off, On]
Operation with USB Menu 2 level
Not [Identified,
USB flash Set value Identified
identified Not identified]
Read log Set value No No [No, Yes]
Upgrade settings Set value No No [No, Yes]
Save settings to flash Set value No No [No, Yes]
Download help Set value No No [No, Yes]
Download screen-saver Set value No No [No, Yes]
Change firmware Set value No No [No, Yes]
Change firmware IND Set value No No [No, Yes]
Not [Not available,
Help file Set value Not available
available Available]
Not [Not available,
Screen-saver file Set value Not available
available Available]
Save emerg. log to USB Set value No No [No, Yes]
Save start-up graphs to USB Set value No No [No, Yes]
Status set-up Menu 2 level
Load Default to Status window Set value No No [No, Yes]
Maintain Operating
Row 1 Set value
parameter mode
Output fre- Deceleration
Row 2 Set value
quency method

160
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Frequency Frequency
Row 3 Set value
setting setting
Current Output fre-
Row 4 Set value
unbalance quency
ESM active ESM current,
Row 5 Set value
current phase U
Total ESM ESM current,
Row 6 Set value
current phase V
Current ESM current,
Row 7 Set value
R ins phase W
Freq. ESM active
Row 8 Set value
backspin. current
Efficiency Total ESM
Row 9 Set value
factor current
Freq.
Row 10 Set value Load factor
backspin.
RS input Underload
Row 11 Set value
voltage set value
ST input
Row 12 Set value Load factor
voltage
TR input Overload
Row 13 Set value
voltage set value
In. voltage Rotation
Row 14 Set value
unbal. direction
ACS set-up Menu 2 level
[Triol, Region,
Telescope, Salym Pet,
Protocol Set value Triol Triol
GasPromHantos, CIS,
ASU TNK, ADKU]
[2.4 kB, 4.8 kB,
9.6 kB, 19.2 kB,
Baud Rate Set value 115.2 kB 9.6 kB
38.4 kB, 57.6 kB,
76.8 kB, 115.2 kB]
Node Address Set value 1 1 1 – 254
StopBit Set value 1 1 1–2
Simulation mode Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Manual start-stop Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Answer delay Set value 5 ms 5 ms 0 ms – 200 ms
Modem used Set value Not used Not used [Not used, Used]
Not [Identified,
Modem identified Set value Identified
identified Not identified]
Adjuster № Set value 1 1 1–5

161
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Country and operator code Set value 0 999 0 – 65535
Telephone number Set value 0 0
Ethernet settings Menu 2 level
IP Type Set value Hand Hand [Hand, Auto]
IP Address Static Set value 192.168.001.010 192.168.001.010

IP Address Mask Set value 255.255.255.000 255.255.255.000

IP Address Gateway Set value 192.168.001.010 192.168.001.010

IP Address Current Set value 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000

NTPServerIPAddress Set value 192.168.001.005 192.168.001.005

NTPTimeIPDeltaSync Set value 24:00 24:00 00:00... 24:00


01 Jan 2001 01 Jan 2001
NTPTimeIPSyncLast Set value
00:00:00 00:00:00
Time UTC Set value present time present time
Time Set value present time present time
Time zone Set value 2h 2h -12 h ... 12 h
Winter/summer time Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Delay fist command Set value 500 ms 500 ms 10...5000 ms
Timeout last command Set value 5000 ms 5000 ms 100...30000 ms
GPRS settings Menu 2 level
Use GPRS Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
APN Set value apn apn
GPRS Port Set value 23 23 0...65535
Status GPRS Information Off Off [Off, On]
Display set-up Menu 2 level
Nos. display Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Text scrolling Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Menu scrolling Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Accelerated editing Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Contrast Set value 20 % 0% -50 % – 50 %
LCD temp. comp. Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Case temp.2 Set value 31.39 °С 0.00 °С -100.00 °С ... 100.00 °С
Setting universal time Menu 2 level
15.04.1970 15.04.1970
Time Set value
23:46:59 16:12:48
Winter/Summer time Set value Off Off [Off, On]
Time Set value Summer Summer [Summer, Winter]
Statistics Menu 2 level
ESM oper. Time Set value 97:34:58 91:01:20

162
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
ESM downtime Set value 297:02:38 291:16:16
Number of starts Set value 202 0 0 – 9999
Overload stop num Set value 0 0 0 – 9999
Underload stop num Set value 1 0 0 – 9999
Other prot. stop num Set value 67 0 0 – 9999
Counters Set value Do not clear Do not clear [Do not clear, Clear]
Total operating time Set value 394:37:35 382:17:36
Energy meter Menu 2 level
Energy meter Set value Used Not used [Not used, Used]
Act. energy from reset Set value 275.4 kW*h 0 kW*h
React. energy from reset Set value 17 kvar*h 0 kvar*h
PrecedDayActEnergy Set value 277.9 kW*h 0 kW*h
PrecedDayReactEnergy Set value 5 kvar*h 0 kvar*h
Act. energy for the day Set value 0 kW*h 0 kW*h
React. energy for the day Set value 0 kvar*h 0 kvar*h
Energy meter Set value Do not clear Do not clear [Do not clear, Clear]
Current timers Menu 2 level
Last start cause Set value Operator Absent
Last stop cause Set value Comm.interr. Absent
25.10.2012 25.10.2012
Start time Set value
14:39:51 09:01:52
25.10.2012 25.10.2012
Stop time Set value
16:17:38 09:01:52
The reason of the next start Set value Absent Absent
Time to ARC Set value 00:00:00 00:00:00
25.10.2012 25.10.2012
Power-up time Set value
14:39:28 09:01:52
25.10.2012 25.10.2012
Power-off time Set value
14:39:27 09:01:52
Time from start Set value 00:00:00 00:00:00
Time from stop Set value 18:30:13 18:12:16
ARS locked Set value Operator Absent
Planned ARS Set value No No [No, Stop, timer]
Too many ARS Set value No No [No, Yes]
Start cause Set value Absent Absent
Stop cause Set value Comm.interr. Absent
VSD parameters Menu 2 level
VSD type Set value 0 0 0 – 65535

163
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
VSD serial No. Set value 0 0
01.01.2001 01.01.2001
VSD manufacture date Set value
00:00:00 00:00:00
VSDC parameters Menu 2 level
VSDC serial No. 0 0
01.01.2001 01.01.2001
VSDC manufacture date Set value
00:00:00 00:00:00
26.10.2012 26.10.2012
VSDC software install date Set value
10:10:44 17:29:36
VSDC software version Set value 31.61 31.61 0.00 – 655.35
Subversion Number Set value 0.00 0 0.00 – 99.99
Drive software version Set value 37.044 0 0.000 – 9.999
VSDC software CRC Set value 24406 0 0 – 65535
Soft integrity Set value No No [No, Yes]
Drive software CRC Set value 18452 0 0 – 65535
[AK-06, AK-02_AС11,
AK-01_AS30, AK-
02_AS30, AK-06-28,
Toshiba, AK06-28,
AK06-28L, Orion-03,
Drive type Set value AK06-28L AK-06 Orion-02_AС11,
Orion-01_AS30,
Orion-02_AS30,
Orion-03-28, Orion-
Toshiba, Orion03-28,
Orion03-28L]
Toggle switch Set value Not used Not used [Not used, Used]
Russian Russian [Russian (Русский),
Language (Язык) Set value
(Русский) (Русский) English (Англ.)]
Length format Set value m m [m, in, mm, ft, km]
Area format Set value m2 m2 [m2, ft2]
Volume format Set value m3 m3 [m3, ft3]
Consumption format Set value m3/h m3/h [m3/h, m3/d, ft3/h, pbh]
Event log Menu 1 level
Viewing mode set-up Menu 2 level
Viewing Starts/Stops Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Viewing emergency trip Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Viewing param. Changes Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Viewing currents Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Viewing voltages Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]

164
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

The continuation of Table D1

Groups Parameter Manufacturer


Value Range
and their parameters type set value
Viewing currents and voltages Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Viewing DME data Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Viewing wellheads and
Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
transducers
Viewing events Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Viewing arbitrary Param. 1 Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Viewing arbitrary Param. 2 Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Viewing arbitrary Param. 3 Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Viewing arbitrary Param. 4 Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Parameter №5 value Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Parameter №6 value Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Parameter №7 value Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Electric energy trends Set value Yes Yes [No, Yes]
Search by time Set value Disable Disable [Disable, Permit]
01.01.2001 31.12.2000
Search Set value
00:00:00 09:44:32
Log Set value Do not clear Do not clear [Do not clear, Clear]
Set. registr. by time Menu 2 level
392 Rec. time oper Set value 10 min 10 min 1 min – 9999 min
394 Urgent rec. Set value 5s 5s 1 s – 10 s
393 Rec. time stop Set value 30 min 30 min 1 min – 9999 min
665 DME rec. period Set value 30 min 30 min 1 min – 9999 min
667 Rec. time start Set value 20 s 5s 1 s – 100 s
Supply failure rec time Set value 120 s 120 s 1 s – 9999 s
TM Triol measurement registr.
Set value 2s 2s 2 s – 1800 s
time
Electric energy registr.(once/day) Set value 1 1 [1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24]
Set. registr. by changes Menu 2 level
Δ I ESM registered Set value 2.2 A 100.0 A 1.0 A – 100.0 A
Δ U registered Set value 10 V 10 V 1 V – 1000 V
Δ Intake pressure registered Set value 100.00 at 100.00 at 0.01 at – 400.00 at
Δ compens.press.recorded Set value 100.00 at 100.00 at 0.01 at – 400.00 at
ΔTemp. amb. Registered Set value 100.0 °С 100.0 °С 0.1 °С – 300.0 °С
Δ Temp. ESM Registered Set value 100.0 °С 100.0 °С 0.1 °С – 300.0 °С
Δ Vibr. Registered Set value 10.00 m/s 2
10.00 m/s 2
0.01 m/s2 – 99.99 m/s2
Δ Pannulus registered Set value 100.00 at 100.00 at 0.01 at – 400.00 at
Δ Pbuff registered Set value 100.00 at 100.00 at 0.01 at – 400.00 at

165
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D1

Δ Pline registered Set value 100.00 at 100.00 at 0.01 at – 400.00 at


Δ Level annulus registered Set value 1000 m 1000 m 1 m – 9999 m
Δ Add. Ain1. registered Set value 100 m /h
3
1000 0.1 m3/h – 6553.5 m3/h
Δ Add. Ain2. registered Set value 100 V 1000 0.1 V – 6553.5 V
Set. registr. custom Menu 2 level
No dis-
Parameter №1 Set value No displayed
played
No dis-
Parameter №2 Set value No displayed
played
No dis-
Parameter №3 Set value No displayed
played
No dis-
Parameter №4 Set value No displayed
played
No dis-
Parameter №5 Set value No displayed
played
No dis-
Parameter №6 Set value No displayed
played
No dis-
Parameter №7 Set value No displayed
played
ΔParameter №1 registered Inform. 1000 1000 1 – 1000
ΔParameter №2 registered Inform. 1000 1000 1 – 1000
ΔParameter №3 registered Inform. 1000 1000 1 – 1000
ΔParameter №4 registered Inform. 1000 1000 1 – 1000
ΔParameter №5 registered Inform. 1000 1000 1 – 1000
ΔParameter №6 registered Inform. 1000 1000 1 – 1000
ΔParameter №7 registered Inform. 1000 1000 1 – 1000

166
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Table D2 — Values of the relative given measurement error for the measured parameters

Relative reduced accu-


Range of measurable values
Measured parameter racy of measurement, no
with a preset accuracy
more than, %
RS input voltage 190–515 V 2,4 %
ST input voltage 190–515 V 2,4 %
TR input voltage 190–515 V 2,4 %
Iout VSD phase U 30 – 110 %* 2,3 %
Iout VSD phase V 30 – 110 %* 2,3 %
Iout VSD phase W 30 – 110 %* 2,3 %
ESM current, phase U As per VSD current** 2,5 %
ESM current, phase V As per VSD current ** 2,5 %
ESM current, phase W As per VSD current** 2,5 %
R ins Protection 1000 – 100000 Ohm 2,5 %
Total ESM current As per VSD current** 2,5 %
ESM active current As per VSD current** 2,5 %
Intake Pressure (0–10 V) 0,3–10 V 2,5 %
Intake Pressure (0–5 mA) 0,1–5 mA 2,3 %
Intake Pressure (4–20 mA) 4,5–20 mA 2,5 %
Compensator pressure (0–10 V) 0,3–10 V 2,5 %
Compensator pressure (0–5 mA) 0,1–5 mA 2,3 %
Compensator pressure (4–20 mA) 4,5–20 mA 2,5 %
Amb. temperature (0–10 V) 0,3–10 V 2,5 %
Amb. temperature (0–5 mA) 0,1–5 mA 2,3 %
Amb. temperature (4–20 mA) 4,5–20 mA 2,5 %
XY Vibration (0–10 V) 0,3–10 V 2,3 %
XY Vibration (0–5 mA) 0,1–5 mA 2,3 %
XY Vibration (4–20 mA) 4,5–20 mA 2,5 %
Z Vibration (0–10 V) 0,3–10 V 2,5 %
Z Vibration (0–5 mA) 0,1–5 mA 2,3 %
Z Vibration (4–20 mA) 4,5–20 mA 2,5 %
Annulus pressure (0–10 V) 0,3–10 V 2,5 %
Annulus pressure (0–5 mA) 0,1–5 mA 2,3 %
Annulus pressure (4–20 mA) 4,5–20 mA 2,5 %
ESM oil temperature (0–10 V) 0,3–10 V 2,5 %
ESM oil temperature (0–5 mA) 0,1–5 mA 2,3 %
ESM oil temperature (4–20 mA) 4,5–20 mA 2,5 %

* — The VSD currents shall be preliminarily calibrated under the VSD rated load ± 15%, load currents shall be fixed
and vary by no more than 1% within 60 sec.
** — Provided that the VSD loading at such ESM current is 30-110% of the VSD rated load, and VSD has been
calibrated at currents close to the VSD rated ones.

167
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table D2

Relative reduced accu-


Range of measurable values
Measured parameter racy of measurement, no
with a preset accuracy
more than, %
Wellhead pressure (0–10 V) 0,3–10 V 2,5 %
(Discharge pressure)
Wellhead pressure (0–5 mA) 0,1–5 mA 2,3 %
Wellhead pressure (4–20 mA) 4,5–20 mA 2,5 %
Flow line pressure (0–10 V) 0,3–10 V 2,5 %
Flow line pressure (0–5 mA) 0,1–5 mA 2,3 %
Flow line pressure (4–20 mA) 4,5–20 mA 2,5 %
Annulus level (0–10 V) 0,3–10 V 2,5 %
Annulus level (0–5 mA) 0,1–5 mA 2,3 %
Annulus level (4–20 mA) 4,5–20 mA 2,5 %

If a digital telemetry system is used, reduced accuracy of measurements is subject to the specification
of the system used.

168
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Annex Е
(normative)

Table of voltage losses values


Table E — Voltage losses values
Voltage losses in cables Voltage losses in cables Voltage losses in cables Voltage losses in cables
with 3x16 mm copper with 3x21 mm copper with 3x25 mm copper with 3x33 mm copper
conductors, V (per 1000 conductors, V (per 1000 conductors, V (per 1000 conductors, V (per 1000
meters) meters) meters) meters)

ESM Stratum ESM Stratum ESM Stratum ESM Stratum


Irated, temperature, oC Irated, temperature, oC Irated, temperature, oC Irated, temperature, oC
A A A A
40-70 70-100 >100 40-70 70-100 >100 40-70 70-100 >100 40-70 70-100 >100
14,6 28 32 35 14,6 21 24 27 14,6 18 20 23 14,6 13 16 17
18 34 39 44 18 26 30 33 18 22 25 28 18 17 19 21
21 40 46 51 21 31 35 39 21 26 29 33 21 19 22 25
22 42 48 53 22 32 37 41 22 27 31 34 22 20 23 26
24 46 .53 58 24 35 40 45 24 29 34 37 24 22 26 28
25 48 55 61 25 37 42 46 25 31 35 39 25 23 27 29
26 50 57 63 26 38 43 48 26 32 36 40 26 24 28 31
27 51 59 66 27 39 45 50 27 33 38 42 27 25 29 32
28 53 61 68 28 41 47 52 28 34 39 44 28 26 30 33
29 55 64 70 29 42 48 54 29 35 41 45 29 27 31 34
30 57 66 73 30 44 50 56 30 37 42 47 30 28 32 35
32 61 70 78 32 47 53 59 32 39 45 50 32 29 34 38
33 63 72 80 33 48 55 61 33 40 46 51 33 30 35 39
34 65 74 83 34 50 57 63 34 42 47 53 34 31 36 40
35 67 77 85 35 51 58 65 35 43 49 54 35 32 37 41
36 69 79 87 36 53 60 67 36 44 50 56 36 33 38 42
37 70 81 90 37 54 62 69 37 45 52 58 37 34 39 43
38 72 83 92 38 55 63 71 38 46 53 59 38 35 40 45
39 74 85 95 39 57 65 72 39 48 54 61 39 36 41 46
40 76 88 97 40 58 67 74 40 49 56 62 40 37 43 47
41 78 90 100 41 60 68 76 41 50 57 64 41 38 44 48
42 80 92 102 42 61 70 78 42 51 59 65 42 39 45 49
43 82 94 104 43 63 72 80 43 53 60 67 43 40 46 51
44 84 96 107 44 64 73 82 44 54 61 68 44 41 47 52
47 90 103 114 47 69 78 87 47 57 66 73 47 43 50 55
48 91 105 117 48 70 80 89 48 59 67 75 48 44 51 56
49 93 107 119 49 72 82 91 49 60 68 76 49 45 52 58
51 97 112 124 51 74 85 95 51 62 71 79 51 47 54 60
53 101 116 129 53 77 88 98 53 65 74 82 53 49 56 62
55 105 120 134 55 80 92 102 55 67 77 86 55 51 58 65

169
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
The continuation of Table E

Voltage losses in cables Voltage losses in cables Voltage losses in cables Voltage losses in cables
with 3x16 mm copper with 3x21 mm copper with 3x25 mm copper with 3x33 mm copper
conductors, V (per 1000 conductors, V (per 1000 conductors, V (per 1000 conductors, V (per 1000
meters) meters) meters) meters)

ESM Stratum ESM Stratum ESM Stratum ESM Stratum


Irated, temperature, oC Irated, temperature, oC Irated, temperature, oC Irated, temperature, oC
A A A A
40-70 70-100 >100 40-70 70-100 >100 40-70 70-100 >100 40-70 70-100 >100
56 107 123 136 56 82 93 104 56 68 78 87 56 52 60 66
57 109 125 138 57 83 95 106 57 70 80 89 57 52 61 67
58 110 127 141 58 85 97 108 58 71 81 90 58 53 62 68
59 112 129 143 59 86 98 110 59 72 82 92 59 54 63 69
60 114 131 146 60 88 100 111 60 73 84 93 60 55 64 70
61 116 134 148 61 89 102 113 61 75 85 95 61 56 65 72
62 118 136 151 62 91 103 115 62 76 87 96 62 57 66 73
63 120 138 153 63 92 105 117 63 77 88 98 63 58 67 74
64 122 140 155 64 93 107 119 64 78 89 100 64 59 68 75
65 124 142 158 65 95 108 121 65 79 91 101 65 60 69 76
67 128 147 163 67 98 112 124 67 82 94 104 67 62 71 79
69 131 151 168 69 101 115 128 69 84 96 107 69 64 73 81
72 137 158 175 72 105 120 134 72 88 101 112 72 66 77 85
73,5 140 161 179 73,5 107 123 137 73,5 90 103 114 73,5 68 78 86
77,5 148 170 188 77,5 113 129 144 77,5 95 108 121 77,5 71 82 91
78,5 150 172 191 78,5 115 131 146 78,5 96 110 122 78,5 72 83 92
81 154 177 197 81 118 135 150 81 99 113 126 81 75 86 95
82 156 180 199 82 120 137 152 82 100 115 128 82 75 87 96
86,5 165 189 210 86,5 126 144 161 86,5 106 121 135 86,5 80 92 102
88 168 193 214 88 129 147 163 88 108 123 137 88 81 94 103
90,5 172 198 220 90,5 132 151 168 90,5 111 126 141 90,5 83 96 106
98 187 215 238 98 143 163 182 98 120 137 152 98 90 104 115
99 189 217 240 99 145 165 184 99 121 138 154 99 91 105 116
104 198 228 253 104 152 173 193 104 127 145 162 104 96 111 122
131 250 287 318 131 191 218 243 131 160 183 204 131 121 139 154
178 339 390 432 178 260 297 331 178 218 249 277 178 164 189 209

170
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Annex F
(normative)

Modem Fargo 100 Maestro instruction

F.1 Modem description

Maestro 100 is finished GSM modem for transfer of voice, data, fax and SMS messages. Also modem
supports GPRS mode class 10 for rapid data transfer. Modem operates by means of AT commands in all
modes. Modem adjusting and setting performs through RS232 (9 outputs, Fig. F.1.)

Condition
15-pin Sub-D female connector
Connector indicator
Ejector button for antenna attachment (serial and audio inputs)
for extracting
SIM card holder

SIM card holder 4-PIN power connector

Figure F.1— Modem description

F.1.1 Condition indicator


LED on a front modem panel shows modem condition:
• Off — modem is off;
• On — modem is connected to the power supply;
• Flashing slowly — modem is on a standby mode;
• Flashing abruptly — modem is on a data transfer mode (only GSM).
F.1.2 Antenna pin connector
It connects with pug-in connector of external antenna. Make sure that antenna is intended for
900/1800 MHz frequency range, insulation 50 Ohm and tight.
F.1.3 15-pin D-SUB female connector (RS232/Audio) is shown in Fig. F.2.
Connector provides serial connection and audio connection of the modem.

Figure F.2 — Specification of D-SUB female connector

171
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Table F.1 — 15-pin D-SUB female connector

Pin number Name EIA designation Type Note

1 DCD Data Carrier Detect Output

2 TX Transmit Data Input

3 BOOT Input Not used

4 MICROPHONE (+) Input

5 MICROPHONE (-) Input

6 RX Receive Data Output

7 DSR Date Set Ready Output

8 DTR Data Terminal Ready Input

9 GND Ground Ground

10 SPEAKER (+) Output

11 CTS Clear to Send Output

12 RTS Request to Send Input

13 RI Ring Indicator Output

14 RESET Input Pull low

15 SPEAKER (-) Output

F.1.4 Power supply PIN

Figure F.3 — Power supply connector

Table F.2 — Assignment of power supply connector pins

Pin number Name Functions

1 I/O Input/output
synchronizable output of interruptions, low active level (ground);
2 ~INTR
reserved for additional functions
3 POWER (-) DC power negative input

4 POWER (+) DC power positive input

172
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Power cable must be used from supply complement.

5-32 V DC Supply

Connector Micro-Fit 3.0 Fuse holder, Stripped


fuse rating: 250 V - 2,5 A wire

Figure F.4 — Connection scheme

Table F.3 — Voltage levels

Parameters Min Standard Max Note

I/O

I/O low level 0 0.5 V

I/O high level 3V 5V

I/O current load 10 mA

INTR
Active level is low (ground) otherwise leave it
Low level 0 0.5 V
open modem damaging
F.1.5 Installing the SIM card
Use a ball pen or paper clip to eject the SIM holder by pressing the eject button. Put the SIM card to
the tray; make sure it is completely inserted in the tray, then carefully put back the tray into the slot.
DO NOT pull out the SIM holder without pushing the ejector button. It may damage modem.
F.1.6 Connecting the external antenna
Make sure that antenna is intended for impedance 50 Ohm and frequency range 900/1800 MHz. Attach
antenna male connector to the socket as shown in Fig. F.5.
F.1.7 Connection to the power supply

Male connector of the antenna cable

Figure F.5 — Connection diagram

Connect power cable with stripped wires as shown in Fig. F.6. Use following parameters for cable selection:
• Power supply voltage — from 5 В to 32 V DC;
• Rated current — 650 mA.

173
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Figure F.6 — Connection diagram

F.2 Modem connecting to PC

Maestro 100 15 pin SUB-D connector Connector DB.9

RS-232 port PC
Figure F.7 — Connection diagram

F.2.1 For modem connection through COM-232 to PC:


1. Cable DB9F/HD15M (for connecting through COM-232);
2. Power supply unit 5 – 32 V;
3. Installed PC driver FTDI;
4. Modem in operating condition;
5. GSM antenna;
6. SIM card of mobile operator;
7. Installed PC actual service software version.

F.2.2 For modem connection through AUSB to PC:


1. Cable DB9F/HD15M;
2. USB cable type A — type B;
3. AUSB unit;
4. Power supply unit 5 – 32 V;
5. Installed PC driver FTDI;
6. Modem in operating condition;
7. SIM card of mobile operator;
8. Installed PC actual service software version.

F.2.3 For connection through USB:


1. Interface converter cable USB/RS232 (HD15M);
2. Power supply unit 5 – 32 V;
3. Installed PC driver FTDI;
4. Modem in operating condition;
5. SIM card of mobile operator;
6. Installed PC actual service software version.

174
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

F.3 Connection procedure

F.3.1 Connection procedure through COM-232:


1. Install driver FTDI on the PC;
2. Connect PC and modem by means of cable DB9F/HD15M;
3. Insert SIM card to the modem;
4. Connect antenna to the modem;
5. Apply supply voltage to the modem (additional COM port should appear in “My computer” shortcut menu).

Figure F.8 — Shortcut menu

Figure F.9 — Shortcut menu

175
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
F.3.2 Connection procedure through AUSB unit:
1. Install driver FTDI on the PC;
2. Connect PC and AUSB unit of type A or B;
3. Connect modem and AUSB unit by means of cable DB9F/HD15M;
4. Insert SIM card to the modem;
5. Connect antenna to the modem;
6. Apply supply voltage to the modem.

F.3.3 Connection procedure through USB:


1. Install driver FTDI on the PC;
2. Connect PC and modem by means of interface converter USB/HD15M;
3. Insert SIM card to the modem;
4. Connect antenna to the modem;
5. Apply supply voltage to the modem.

F.4 Operation start with modem

F.4.1 1 Operation with modem from the UMKA-03 side:


1. Enter UMKA-03 “System/ACS set-up” menu;
2. Choose: “664 Protocol” — “Triol”;
3. Choose: “399 Exchange rate” — “115,2 kB”;
4. Choose: “Modem used” — “Used”;
5. “Identified” will appear in Modem string after applying of changes.

Figure F.10 — Controller UMKA-03 menu

F.4.2 Operation with modem from service software side:


1. Enter menu “Settings”;
2. Choose COM port number for modem connection;

Figure F.11 — Service software UMKA settings menu

176
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

3. Choose phone number of the inserted SIM card in format +************ (Country code,
operator code, subscriber number), there are no spaces, brackets and hyphens. If list is empty, click
“Add contact”.

Figure F.12 — Service software UMKA settings menu

Click button “Add contact” and add VSD number to the list.

Figure F.13— Service software UMKA settings menu

4. Entering a new number:


• enter modem number and addition information in fields;
• click button “Add”;
• click button “Confirm”.
5. Edit old number:
• select table row;
• edit data in fields;
• click button “Edit” etc.;
• click button “Confirm”.
6. Data deleting:
• select table row which is editing;
• click button “Delete” etc.;
• click button “Confirm”.
7. Canceling:
• click button “Cancel”.

177
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Figure F.14 — Service software UMKA settings menu

Click button “Confirm” for modem list changes applying (for saving all changes the same).

Click button for connection between modem and VSD by set number. Password entering field will
appear.

Figure F.15 — «Enter access password» window

“Incorrect password” message will appear after entering wrong password.

Figure F.16 — «Incorrect password» window

“Wait ... second. Modem is connecting” message will appear after entering right password.

Figure F.17 — «Enter access password» window

“Modem doesn’t answer” message will appear if modem is out of order, incorrect modem connection,
wrong COM port number in settings.

Figure F.18 — «Modem doesn’t answer» window

If modem connected, software interrogate signal power and money balance.

178
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Software adjusts base parameter setting of connection. Failure is possible at this operations.
“Modem settings isn’t set” message appears then and there is no possibility for further connection.
Software starts connection between modem and VSD if there are no issues.
“Connection isn’t established. Check number and modem connection of VSD” message appears
if following events happened:
• modem is out of order;
• modem is off;
• connection parameters aren’t set in UMKA-03 menu (Fig. F.10).
Otherwise “Connection is established” message appears.

8. Buttons will be active — after call. This means that connection


has been established.

F.5 Remote VSD operation

F.5.1 Current controller condition (table):


1. Click button after connection establishing;
2. Table of current controller condition will appear on the display (Fig. F.22).

Figure F.22 — «Current controller condition» window

F.5.2 Current controller condition (graph):


1. Click button after connection establishing;
2. Current controller condition will appear on the display in graphical view.

179
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Figure F.23 — “Current controller condition” window

F.5.3 Reading/recording of controller presets:


1. Click button after connection establishing;
2. Current table of VSD presets will appear on the display;
3. Click button for preset reading from the controller;
4. Click button for preset recording into the controller;
5. Click button for preset recover.

Figure F.24 — Current preset value of the VSD

F.5.4 Reading from the controller event log:


1. Click button after establishing of connection;
2. Operation with controller window will open;
3. Click button for reading event log;
4. Time setting is possible in the tab «Time synchronization».

180
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M
Operating Manual

Figure F.25 — Operation with controller

F.6 Session ending

Click button for session interrupting after remote control finishing.


If connection lost «Modem and VSD connection is failed. Connection lost» message appears.
Modem connection interrupts after set time during operation with windows or tables of presets
when parameter “GSM connection blocking after time (1 – 180 minutes)” is set. “Allowable time ended.
Session ended” message appears.
«Event log has been read. Session ended» message appears after event log reading.

F.7 Troubleshooting

F.7.1 The modem’s LED does not light:


• check if the external power has been properly connected to the modem;
• check if the power connector is properly inserted;
• check the fuse in the power cord.
F.7.2 The modem’s LED lights but does not blink long time after power up:
• check if a valid SIM card has been properly inserted;
• check if the SIM card has been locked (refer to AT+CPIN command in AT command guide);
• check if the network coverage is available;
• make sure that the CTS and DTR pins of the serial port are not connected together.
F.7.3 The modem does not respond to the terminal program:
• check if the RS232 cable has been properly connected;
• check if your program has proper settings. Factory setting of the modem is:
• 15200 bps;
• 8 data bits;
• No parity bit;
• 1 stop bit 4.

181
T R I O L C O R P O R A T I O N w w w . t r i o l c o r p . c o m
Annex G
List of elements and electric schematic diagram

182
А Т. 6 5 4 2 5 1 . 2 7 3 O M

You might also like